G500
G55AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you Please read this manual carefully, then
on the purchase of your new return it to your vehicle where it will be
Mercedes-Benz. handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon- Please follow the recommendations
stration of your trust in our company contained in this manual. They are de-
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your de- signed to acquaint you with the opera-
sire to own an automobile that will be as tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
easy as possible to operate and provide
Please pay attention to the warnings
years of service.
and cautions contained in this manual.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- They are designed to help improve the
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure, cupants.
and also the safety of you and your passen-
We extend our best wishes for many miles
gers, we ask you to make a small invest-
of safe, pleasurable driving.
ment of time:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Driving.................................................. 40
Introduction.......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 21
Fastening the seat belt ................... 40
Product information................................ 9 Cockpit................................................. 22
Starting the engine ......................... 43
Operator s Manual............................... 10 Instrument cluster ................................ 24
Switching on headlamps................. 46
Service and warranty information .. 10 Multifunction steering wheel ................ 26
Turn signals and high beam ............ 46
Important notice for California Center console ..................................... 27
Windshield wipers........................... 47
retail buyers and lessees of Upper part ...................................... 27
Rear window wiper/washer............ 49
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11 Lower part ...................................... 28
Problems while driving.................... 50
Maintenance .................................. 12 Overhead control panel ........................ 29
Parking and locking.............................. 51
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12 Door control panel................................ 30
Parking brake ................................. 51
Change of address or ownership.... 13
Switching off headlamps................. 52
Operating your vehicle outside the
Turning off engine........................... 52
Getting started ................................... 31
USA or Canada............................... 13
Unlocking ............................................. 32
Where to find it.................................... 15
Unlocking with the SmartKey.......... 32
Symbols............................................... 16 Safety and Security ........................... 55
Adjusting .............................................. 34
Operating safety .................................. 17 Occupant safety ................................... 56
Seats............................................... 34
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 17 Airbags ........................................... 57
Steering wheel................................ 37
Problems with your vehicle.................. 18 Seat belts ....................................... 62
Mirrors............................................ 38
Reporting safety defects...................... 19 Children in the vehicle .................... 65
Reporting safety defects ................ 19 Blocking rear door window
operation ........................................ 71
Panic alarm .......................................... 73
Contents
Driving and safety systems .................. 74 Seats ................................................... 94 Instrument cluster ............................. 112
ABS ................................................ 74 Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 94 Instrument cluster illumination .... 112
BAS ................................................ 76 Removing and installing front seat Coolant temperature display........ 112
4-ETS.............................................. 77 head restraints............................... 95 Trip odometer .............................. 113
EBB................................................. 78 Synchronizing head restraints and Tachometer.................................. 113
ESP................................................. 78 seat adjustment fore and aft for Outside temperature indicator..... 114
Anti-theft systems................................ 82 front seats...................................... 95 Control system .................................. 115
Immobilizer..................................... 82 Rear seat head restraints............... 96 Multifunction display.................... 115
Anti-theft alarm .............................. 82 Multicontour seat*......................... 97 Multifunction steering wheel........ 116
Tow-away alarm ............................. 83 Heated seats.................................. 98 Menus.......................................... 118
Memory function ............................... 101 Standard display menu ................ 120
Storing positions into memory ..... 102 AUDIO menu ................................ 120
Controls in detail ............................... 85
Recalling positions from memory. 102 NAVI menu................................... 122
Locking and unlocking ......................... 86
Storing exterior rear view mirror Malfunction memory menu .......... 122
SmartKey ....................................... 86
parking position ........................... 103 Settings menu.............................. 123
Opening the doors from the inside . 89
Lighting.............................................. 104 Trip computer menu..................... 136
Opening the tailgate....................... 89
Exterior lamp switch..................... 104 TEL menu ..................................... 137
Closing the tailgate ........................ 90
Combination switch ..................... 107 Automatic transmission..................... 140
Separately locking the tailgate ....... 90
Hazard warning flasher ................ 108 One-touch gearshifting ................ 141
Separately unlocking the tailgate ... 91
Interior lighting............................. 109 Gear ranges ................................. 142
Automatic central locking .............. 91
Rear interior lamps....................... 110 Gear selector lever position ......... 142
Locking and unlocking from
Cargo compartment lamps........... 110 Accelerator position..................... 144
the inside ....................................... 92
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) ...................... 144
Contents
Transfer case..................................... 145 Power windows .................................. 164
Operation.......................................... 205
Gear range ................................... 145 Opening and closing the windows. 164
The first 1000 miles (1500 km).......... 206
Switching transfer case................ 145 Sliding/pop-up roof............................ 166
Driving instructions ............................ 207
Differential locks ............................... 148 Opening and closing the
Drive sensibly  save fuel ............. 207
A few words about differentials sliding/pop-up roof....................... 166
Drinking and driving...................... 207
and differential locks.................... 149 Driving systems.................................. 169
Pedals........................................... 207
Switching differential locks Cruise control ............................... 169
Power assistance.......................... 208
on and off..................................... 150 Rear Parking Assist*..................... 172
Brakes .......................................... 208
Good visibility .................................... 152 Loading............................................... 175
Driving off ..................................... 209
Rear view mirror........................... 152 Roof rack ...................................... 175
Parking ......................................... 209
Headlamp cleaning system .......... 153 Cargo compartment cover ............ 175
Tires.............................................. 210
Sun visors .................................... 154 Enlarged cargo compartment........ 176
Hydroplaning ................................ 210
Rear window defroster................. 155 Split rear seat bench..................... 176
Tire traction .................................. 211
Climate control.................................. 156 Partition net* (MB Accessory) ...... 178
Tire speed rating........................... 211
Setting the temperature............... 158 Loading instructions ..................... 180
Winter driving instructions............ 212
Adjusting air distribution and Cargo tie-down rings..................... 182
Standing water ............................. 213
volume ......................................... 159 Useful features ................................... 183
Passenger compartment............... 213
Defrosting .................................... 160 Interior storage spaces ................. 183
Off-road driving............................. 213
Air recirculation............................ 160 Ashtrays........................................ 186
Control and operation of radio
Residual engine heat utilization.... 161 Cigarette lighter............................ 188
transmitters.................................. 221
Deactivating the climate control Electrical outlet............................. 188
Driving abroad .............................. 222
system ......................................... 162 Telephone* ................................... 189
Catalytic converter ....................... 222
Air conditioning............................ 162 Tele Aid......................................... 190
Emission control ........................... 222
Rear passenger compartment Garage door opener...................... 198
Coolant temperature .................... 223
adjustable air vents...................... 163 Heated steering wheel .................. 203
Contents
At the gas station............................... 224 Maintenance...................................... 242 Unlocking/locking in an emergency.. 287
Refueling ...................................... 224 Clearing the service indicator ...... 242 Unlocking the vehicle................... 287
Check regularly and before Service term exceeded ................ 242 Locking the vehicle ...................... 288
a long trip..................................... 225 Calling up the service indicator.... 243 Changing batteries in
Engine compartment.......................... 227 Resetting the service indicator..... 243 the SmartKey ............................... 288
Hood ............................................ 227 Vehicle care....................................... 244 Fuel filler flap ............................... 290
Engine oil...................................... 228 Cleaning and care of the vehicle .. 244 Manually unlocking the
Transmission fluid level ................ 232 transmission gear selector lever .. 290
Coolant level ................................ 232 Opening/closing in an emergency .... 292
Practical hints.................................. 251
Windshield/rear window washer Sliding/pop-up roof ..................... 292
What to do if & .................................. 252
system and headlamp cleaning Brush guard* ..................................... 293
Lamps in instrument cluster ........ 252
system.......................................... 234 Lowering and raising brush guard 294
Lamp in center console................ 259
Battery ............................................... 235 Replacing bulbs ................................. 295
Messages in the multifunction
Tires and wheels ................................ 236 Bulbs............................................ 295
display.......................................... 260
Important guidelines .................... 236 Replacing bulbs for front lamps ... 297
Where will I find ...? ........................... 283
Life of tire..................................... 237 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps .... 301
First aid kit ................................... 283
Direction of rotation ..................... 237 Replacing wiper blades...................... 304
Vehicle tool kit ............................. 283
Checking tire inflation pressure ... 237 Removing wiper blades ................ 304
Vehicle jack.................................. 284
Rotating wheels............................ 238 Installing wiper blades ................. 305
CD changer .................................. 284
Winter driving..................................... 240 Flat tire.............................................. 306
Spare wheel ................................. 285
Winter tires................................... 240 Preparing the vehicle ................... 306
Block heater (Canada only) .......... 240 Mounting the spare wheel ........... 307
Snow chains................................. 241
Contents
Battery............................................... 311 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc........... 333
Technical data .................................. 323
Charging the battery .................... 311 Capacities..................................... 333
Spare parts service............................. 324
Disconnecting the battery............ 312 Engine oils .................................... 334
Warranty coverage ............................. 325
Reconnecting the battery............. 312 Engine oil additives....................... 335
Loss of Service and Warranty
Jump starting ..................................... 313 Air conditioning refrigerant........... 335
Information Booklet ...................... 325
Towing the vehicle............................. 315 Brake fluid .................................... 335
Identification labels ............................ 326
Transporting the vehicle............... 317 Premium unleaded gasoline.......... 335
Layout of poly-V-belt drive.................. 327
Towing the vehicle - Fuel requirements......................... 336
G 500/G 55 AMG ......................... 327
various problem scenarios ........... 317 Gasoline additives......................... 336
Engine ................................................ 328
Front towing eye .......................... 318 Coolants ....................................... 336
Rims and tires .................................... 329
Rear towing eye ........................... 318 Anticorrosion/antifreeze .............. 337
Rims and Tires ............................. 329
Freeing a stranded vehicle ........... 318 Windshield/rear window washer
Spare wheels ................................ 330
Fuses ................................................. 319 system and headlamp cleaning
Electrical system ................................ 331
Fuse box in passenger system .......................................... 339
Main dimensions, vehicle weights
compartment ............................... 319 Consumer information........................ 340
and ratings ......................................... 332
Fuse box in battery box................ 319 Uniform tire quality grading .......... 340
Main dimensions........................... 332
Fuse box in front passenger
Vehicle weights and ratings .......... 332
footwell ........................................ 320
Technical terms ............................... 343
Fuse box in middle tunnel ............ 321
Index ................................................. 349
Introduction
Product information
Product information
Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Genuine Mercedes-Benz original parts as
best interest: other products and therefore cannot be well as conversion parts and accessories
held responsible for them, even if in indi- approved by us are available at your autho-
We recommend using genuine
vidual cases an official approval or authori- rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
zation by governmental or other agencies where you will receive comprehensive in-
parts and accessories explicitly approved
should exist. Use of such parts and acces- formation, also on permissible technical
by us for your vehicle model.
sories could adversely affect the safety, modifications, and where proper installa-
We have tested these parts to determine
performance or reliability of your vehicle. tion will be performed.
their reliability, safety and special suitabili-
Please do not use them.
ty for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
9
Introduction
Operator s Manual
Operator s Manual
This Operator s Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding
The Service and Warranty Information
read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes
Booklet contains detailed information
with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor-
about the warranties covering your
mation, illustrations and descriptions in
For your own safety and longer service life
Mercedes-Benz, including:
this Operator s Manual might differ from
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
your vehicle.
New Light Truck Limited Warranty,
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in
Emission System Warranty,
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc-
Emission Performance Warranty,
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are
ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from
Vermont Emission Control System
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are
Vermont only),
Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operator s
optional equipment not installed in your Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about Light Truck Center will be glad to inform
(Lemon Laws).
the operation of any equipment, your au- you of correct care and operating proce-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen- dures.
ter will be glad to demonstrate the proper
The Operator s Manual and Service Book-
procedures.
let are important documents and should be
kept with the vehicle.
10
Introduction
Operator s Manual
Important notice for California (1) the same substantial defect or mal- (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
retail buyers and lessees of function results in a condition that is of repair of the same or different sub-
Mercedes-Benz automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily stantial defects or malfunctions for a
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to
fect or malfunction has been subject to 30 calender days. Written notification
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
repair two or more times, and you have should be sent to us, not a dealer, at
of the purchase price or lease price, if
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au-
LLC in writing of the need for its repair, Assistance Center, One Mercedes
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
(2) the same substantial defect or mal-
one or more substantial defects or mal-
function of a less serious nature than
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
category (1) has been subject to repair
its express warranty after a reasonable
four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
its repair, or
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18 000 miles (approx. 29 000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair at-
tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following oc-
curs:
11
Introduction
Operator s Manual
Maintenance Roadside Assistance Additional charges may be applicable for a
breakdown location determined not to be a
The Service Booklet describes all the nec- The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
reasonably accessible roadside location as
essary maintenance work which should be Program provides factory-trained technical
determined by our authorized technician
performed at regular intervals. help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
and tow service provider.
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
Always have the Service Booklet with you
For additional information refer to the
when you take the vehicle to your autho- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
gram Brochure in your glove box.
for service. The service advisor will record
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Cus-
each service in the booklet for you.
tomer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Roadside Assistance will be provided in ac-
cordance with standard program guide-
lines which include providing service to the
vehicle up to a reasonable distance from a
paved roadway. We will make every effort
to assist in a breakdown situation, howev-
er, the accessibility of your vehicle will be
determined by our authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center techni-
cian or the tow service provider on a case
by case basis and may be a factor in our
ability to respond.
12
Introduction
Operator s Manual
Change of address or ownership Operating your vehicle outside the USA Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail-
or Canada able for delivery in Europe under our Euro-
If you change your address, be sure to
pean Delivery Program. For details, consult
send in the  Change of Address Notice If you plan to operate your vehicle in for-
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
found in the Service and Warranty Informa- eign countries, please be aware that:
write to:
tion Booklet, or simply call the
service facilities or replacement parts
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
may not be readily available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Center (in the USA) at
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat-
European Delivery Department
1-800-FOR-MER-Cedes, or Customer Ser-
alytic converters may not be available;
One Mercedes Drive
vice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
your own interest that we can contact you
catalysts,
should the need arise.
In Canada:
gasoline may have a considerably low-
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
er octane rating, and improper fuel can
literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
European Delivery Department
cause engine damage.
able to the next operator.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the  Notice of Purchase of Used
Truck found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
13
Introduction
Operator s Manual
Warning! G
This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both on-road and off-road use. It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel drive
passenger cars are not intended. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from conventional passenger cars in driving conditions which
may occur on streets, highways and off-road use.
This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this type, if you
make sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may roll over or may go out of control and crash. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
and severe or fatal injury.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Operator s Manual. Take time to become familiar with the driving characteristics of this vehicle. Be
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Do not attempt sharp turns at excessive
speeds or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When driving off-road or working the vehicle
hard, do not overload it. And, always wear your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a seat belt.
14
Introduction
Where to find it
Where to find it
This Operator s Manual is designed to pro-
Controls in detail Technical data
vide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section
Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your vehi-
has its own reference color so you can find
about the equipment installed on your ve- cle can be found in this section.
information quickly.
hicle. This section expands on the  Getting
started section and also describes techni-
Indexes
cal innovations. If you are already familiar
At a glance
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
The glossary provides explanations of the
Here you will find an overview of all the this section will be of particular interest to
most important technical terms.
controls that can be operated from the you.
The table of contents and the index are de-
driver s seat.
signed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
Operation
Getting started
The following publications are part of your
Here you will find all the information you
vehicle documentation:
Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi-
need for your first drive. You should read cle.
this Operator s Manual
this section first if this is your first
the Service Booklet
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent-
Practical hints
ing or borrowing this vehicle.
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
This section provides fast assistance for
equipment options installed in your vehi-
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Safety and Security
cle.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features of your vehicle.
15
Introduction
Symbols
Symbols
The following symbols are found in this This symbol points to instructions for
Warning! G
Operator s Manual: you to follow.
* Optional equipment is identified A number of these symbols appearing
Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
with an asterisk. Since standard in succession indicates a multiple-step
ards that may endanger your health or life,
equipment varies between models, procedure.
or the health or life of others.
the descriptions and illustrations in
Page This symbol tells you where to
this manual may differ slightly from
look for further information on a
!
the actual equipment of your vehi-
topic.
cle. Highlights hazards that may result in
This continuation symbol marks
damage to your vehicle.
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
i
page.
Helpful hints or further information you
-> In the glossary of technical
may find useful.
terms, this symbol is used to in-
dicate cross-references to term
definitions.
Display Words appearing in the multi-
function display are printed in
the type shown here.
16
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle
Warning! G Warning! G
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
Work improperly carried out on electronic Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
are familiar with the following information
components and associated software could or tires/wheels, for example when running
and rules:
cause them to cease functioning. Because over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
the safety precautions in this manual
the vehicle s electronic components are in- may cause serious damage and impair the
the  Technical data section in this
terconnected, any modifications made may operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a
manual
produce an undesired effect on other sys- sudden significant vibration or ride distur-
tems. Electronic malfunctions could seri- bance, or you suspect that damage to your
traffic rules and regulations
ously impair the operating safety of your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
vehicle. your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow
dards
down, and drive with caution to an area
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
which is a safe distance from the road.
Truck Center for repairs or modifications to
Warning! G
electronic components. Inspect the vehicle underbody and
tires/wheels for possible damage. If the ve-
Other improper work or modifications on the
Various warning labels are attached to your
hicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
the operating safety of the vehicle.
to make you and others aware of various
Truck Center or other qualified maintenance
Some safety systems only function while the
risks. You should not remove any of these
or repair facility for further inspection or re-
engine is running. You should therefore nev-
warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
pairs.
er turn off the engine while driving.
do so by information on the label itself. Re-
moval of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or per-
sonal injury.
17
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If
the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center management,
or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5
18
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
 National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 .
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from the Hotline.
19
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel
21
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
22
At a glance
Cockpit
Item Page Item Page
1 Combination switch 6 Starter switch 33
Turn signals 46 7 Glove box 183
Windshield wipers 47 8 Multifunction steering 26,
wheel 116,
High beam 46
203
2 Headlamp cleaning system 153
9 Horn
3 Cruise control lever 169
a Steering wheel adjustment 37,
4 Instrument cluster 24
stalk 203
5 Lever for voice control sys-
b Exterior lamp switch 46,
tem*, see separate operat-
104
ing instructions
c Exterior rear view mirror 38
adjustment
23
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
24
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item Page Item Page Item Page
1 Reset button for: 4 K Right turn signal in- 24 7 Speedometer
dicator lamp
Resetting trip odometer 113 8 Tachometer with:
5 Fuel gauge with:
Resetting individual or 123, ; Brake warning lamp 44,
all settings 125, Fuel reserve warning lamp 24 (USA only) 254
137,
1 Supplemental Re- 60, 3 Brake warning lamp 44,
243
straint System (SRS) 258 (Canada only) 254
Instrument cluster illu- 112 indicator lamp
- ABS indicator lamp 74,
mination
< Seat belt non-usage 62, 252
2 L Left turn signal indi- 24 warning lamp 258
cator lamp
6 Multifunction display 115
3 ? Engine malfunction 256 with:
indicator lamp
Trip odometer 24
v Electronic Stability 78,
Main odometer 24
Program (ESP) warn- 257
Transfer case program 145
ing lamp
mode
A High beam head- 47,
Gear selector lever position 140
lamp indicator 108
Outside temperature indi- 114
cator
Clock (see COMAND oper- 115
ating instructions)
25
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel
Item Page Item Page
1 Multifunction display in 115 4 Menu systems: Press but-
speedometer ton
Operating control sys- 116 Ł for next system
tem:
� for previous system
2 Selecting the submenu or
5 Moving within a menu:
setting the volume
Press button
� down/ to decrease
j for next display
ć up / to increase
k for previous display
3 Telephone*: Press button
� to take a call
� to end a call
26
At a glance
Center console
Center console
Upper part
Item Page Item Page
1 Left front seat heater 98 8 Hazard warning flasher 108
switch switch
2 Switch for rear window 49 9 COMAND system, see sep-
wiper/washer arate operating instruc-
tions
3 ESP control switch 79
a Ashtray with lighter 186,
4 Differential lock switches 150
188
5 Central locking switch 92
b Climate control 156
6 Anti-theft alarm system in- 82
c 7 indicator lamp 68,
dicator lamp
259
Tow-away alarm switch 83
7 Right front seat heater 98
switch
27
At a glance
Center console
Lower part
Item Page
1 Storage tray
2 Gear selector lever for 43,
automatic transmission 140
3 Transfer case switch 145
4 Parking brake 44,
51
28
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
Item Page Item Page
1 Tele Aid (emergency call 190 6 Signal transmitter keys for 198
system) garage door opener
2 Cargo compartment lamps 110 7 Indicator lamp for garage 198
door opener
3 Right front reading lamp 109
8 Interior lighting control 109
4 Sliding/pop-up roof 166
9 Left front reading lamp 109
5 Interior rear view mirror 38
29
At a glance
Door control panel
Door control panel
Item Page
1 Switches for opening/clos- 164
ing power window
Switch for rear door win- 71
dow override
2 Seat adjustment 34,
94
3 Door handle 89
4 Memory function (for stor- 101
ing seat, exterior mirrors
and steering wheel set-
tings)
30
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
31
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking
The  Getting started section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey Press unlock button R
on the
overview of the vehicle s most basic func- SmartKey.
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
should pay special attention to the infor-
locking knobs in the doors move up.
mation given here.
Get in the vehicle and insert the
If you are already familiar with the basic
SmartKey in the starter switch.
functions described here, the  Controls in
For more information, see  Locking and
detail section will help you with further in-
unlocking ( page 86).
formation. The corresponding page refer-
ences are at the end of each segment.
SmartKey with remote control
1 9 Lock button
2 R
Unlock button
3 �Panic button ( page 73)
32
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions
!
Warning! G
If the SmartKey cannot be turned, the
battery may not be sufficiently
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
charged.
SmartKey from the starter switch and lock
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattend- Check the battery and charge it if
necessary ( page 311).
ed in the vehicle, or with access to an un-
locked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
Get a jump start ( page 313).
equipment may cause an accident and/or
To prevent accelerated battery dis-
serious personal injury.
charge and a possible dead battery, al-
ways remove the SmartKey from the
Starter switch
i
starter switch when the engine is not in
0 For removing SmartKey
The SmartKey can only be removed
operation.
The steering is locked when the
from the starter switch with the gear
SmartKey is removed from the starter
selector lever in position P.
switch. If necessary, move steering
wheel slightly to allow the locking
mechanism to engage.
1 Power supply to some electrical con-
sumers, such as seat adjustment
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
3 Starting position
33
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting
The seat back and seat belts provide the
Warning! G Warning! G
best restraint when the wearer is in an up-
right position and belts are properly posi-
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and Children 12 years old and under must never
tioned on the body. Your seat must be
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas- ride in the front seat, except in a
adjusted so that you can correctly fasten
tening of seat belts, must be done before Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
your seat belt ( page 40).
the vehicle is put into motion. compatible child seat, which operates with
Never place hands under the seat or near the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
any moving parts while a seat is being ad- hicle to deactivate the passenger front air-
Seats
justed. bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
Warning! G
Warning! G fatal injury will result.
Do not adjust the driver s seat while driving.
According to accident statistics, children
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
are safer when properly restrained in the
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
your vehicle.
ing positions. Infants and small children
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
The power seats can also be operated with
must ride in the back seats and be seated in
back reclined. Sitting in an excessively re-
the driver s or front passenger door open.
an appropriate infant or child restraint sys-
clined position can be dangerous. You could
Do not leave children unattended in the ve- tem, which is properly secured with the ve-
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
hicle s seat belt and top tether strap, or
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
secured via lower anchors and top tether
the abdomen or neck. That could cause se-
cause an accident and/or serious personal
strap, fully in accordance with the child seat
rious or fatal injuries.
injury.
manufacturer s instructions.
34
Getting started
Adjusting
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
i
A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
to position 1 or 2 ( page 33).
When moving the seat, be sure that
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and or
there are no items in the footwell or
the child is not properly secured in the child
behind the seats
Open the driver s or front passenger
restraint.
door.
the cup holder next to the armrest
is removed ( page 185)
Seat adjustment
Seat fore and aft adjustment
the cup holder in the front passen-
The seat adjustment switches are located
Press the switch forward or back in the
ger footwell is folded closed
in each front door.
direction of arrow 3.
( page 185)
Adjust to a comfortable seating posi-
Otherwise you could damage the seats
tion that still allows you to reach the
and/or cup holders.
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
The memory function ( page 101) lets
position should be as far to the rear as
you store the setting for the seat posi-
possible, consistent with ability to
tion together with the setting for the
properly operate controls.
steering wheel and the exterior rear
view mirrors.
1 Head restraint height
2 Seat backrest tilt
3 Seat fore and aft adjustment
4 Seat cushion tilt
5 Seat height
35
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat cushion tilt Head restraint height Head restraint tilt
Press the switch up or down in the di- Press the switch up or down in the di-
rection of arrow 4 until your upper rection of arrow 1.
legs are lightly supported.
Warning! G
Seat backrest tilt
For your protection, drive only with properly
Press the switch forward or backward
positioned head restraints.
in the direction of arrow 2 until your
arms are slightly angled when holding
Adjust head restraint so that the head re-
the steering wheel.
straint supports the back of the head at eye
Manually adjust the angle of the head re-
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
Seat height
to the head and neck in the event of an ac- straint.
cident or similar situation.
Press the switch up or down in the di-
Push or pull on the upper edge of the
rection of arrow 5.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraint cushion.
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
Make sure you have sufficient head-
For more information, see  Seats
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
room.
( page 94).
dent.
Adjust head restraint to support the back
of the head approximately at eye level.
36
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel The stalk is located on the steering column Adjusting steering column in or out
(lower left).
Move stalk forward or back in the direc-
tion of arrow 1 until a comfortable
Warning! G
steering wheel position is reached with
your arms slightly bent at the elbow.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv-
Adjusting steering column up or down
ing, or driving without the adjustment
locked could cause the driver to lose control Move stalk up or down in the direction
of the vehicle. of arrow 2.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
Make sure your legs can move freely
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
and that all the displays (incl. malfunc-
1 Adjusting steering column, in or out
your vehicle.
tion and indicator lamps) on the instru-
2 Adjusting steering column, up or down
ment cluster are clearly visible.
The steering wheel adjustment feature can
also be operated with the driver s door Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
i
open. Do not leave children unattended in to position 1 or 2 ( page 33).
The memory function ( page 101) lets
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked or
you store the setting for the steering
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
Open the driver s door.
wheel together with the setting for the
ment may cause an accident and/or serious
seat position and the exterior rear view
personal injury.
mirrors.
For more information, see  Heated steer-
ing wheel ( page 203).
37
Getting started
Adjusting
Mirrors Interior rear view mirror The buttons are located above the exterior
lamp switch.
Manually adjust the interior rear view
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirror.
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic condi-
Exterior rear view mirror
tions.
Warning! G
Warning! G
Exercise care when using the passen-
In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
glass breaks.
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
1 Adjustment button
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
are closer than they appear. Check your in-
2 Driver s side mirror
low the liquid to come into contact with
terior rear view mirror or glance over your
3 Passenger-side mirror
eyes, skin, clothing, or the respiratory sys-
shoulder before changing lanes.
tem. In case it does, immediately flush af-
fected area with water, and seek medical
help if necessary.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their liq-
uid state and by applying plenty of wa-
ter.
38
Getting started
Adjusting
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
i
The memory function ( page 101) lets
All the lights in the instrument cluster
you store the setting for the exterior
come on.
rear view mirrors together with the set-
Press button 2 for driver s side exteri-
ting for the steering wheel and the seat
or rear view mirror or button 3 for
position.
passenger-side exterior rear view mir-
ror.
!
Push adjustment button 1 up, down,
If an exterior rear view mirror housing
left or right according to the setting de-
is forcibly pushed forward or rearward,
sired.
reposition it by applying firm pressure
until it snaps into place. The exterior
rear view mirror housing is now proper-
ly positioned and you can adjust the
mirror normally.
For more information, see  Storing exterior
rear view mirror parking position
( page 103).
39
Getting started
Driving
Driving
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
Warning! G Warning! G
sition your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
Do not lay any objects in the driver s foot- Children 12 years old and under must never
accident. You and your passengers should
well. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in ride in the front seat, except in a
always wear seat belts.
the driver s footwell have sufficient clear- Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
ance for the pedals. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries compatible child seat, which operates with
can be considerably more severe without the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
During sudden driving or braking maneu-
your seat belt properly buckled. Without hicle to deactivate the passenger front air-
vers, the objects could get caught between
your seat belt buckled, you are much more bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
the pedals. You could then no longer brake
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
or accelerate.
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
or killed. fatal injury will result.
Fastening the seat belt
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or According to accident statistics, children
death is lessened if you are wearing your are safer when properly restrained in the
seat belt. The airbags can only protect as ex- rear seating positions than in the front seat-
Warning! G
pected if the occupants are using their seat ing positions. Infants and small children
belts ( page 56). must ride in back seats and be seated in an
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
off. Always make sure your passengers are
which is properly secured with the vehicle's
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
rear and pregnant women.
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufactur-
er s instructions.
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automo-
tive Corp.
40
Getting started
Driving
A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
Warning! G
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
the child is not properly secured in the child
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
restraint.
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re-
strained with a separate seat belt.
Warning! G
Warning! G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively
Read and observe the additional warning no-
reclined position can be dangerous. You
tices printed in the  Safety and Security
could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
section ( page 60) and ( page 62).
If you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
1 Latch plate
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
2 Buckle
backrest and seat belt provide the best re-
3 Release button
straint when the wearer is in an upright po-
With a smooth motion, pull the belt
sition and the belt is properly positioned on
from the belt outlet.
the body.
Place the belt over your shoulder.
Push latch plate 1 into buckle 2 until
it clicks.
41
Getting started
Driving
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to Check your seat belt during travel to Seat belt height adjustment
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion ensure it is properly positioned.
Adjust the height so that the upper part of
up.
Make sure the seat belt is always fitted the belt runs over the middle of the shoul-
snugly. You should avoid wearing bulky der.
Proper use of seat belts
clothing, such as winter coats, when
Do not twist the belt when fastening. traveling in the vehicle.
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
Warning! G
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
not touch the neck or pass under the
could tear.
arm). For this purpose, you can adjust
the height of the belt outlet, see below.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
Position the lap belt as low as possible
This could damage the belt.
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
1 Button for belt outlet height adjust-
across the abdomen.
Never attempt to make modifications to
ment
seat belts. This could impair the effective-
Place the seat backrest in a nearly up-
ness of the belts.
right position.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
Never use a seat belt for more than one
stressed in an accident must be replaced.
person at a time.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Do not fasten a seat belt around a per-
Truck Center.
son and another object at the same
time.
42
Getting started
Driving
Adjusting belt outlet higher Starting the engine Automatic transmission
Slide belt outlet upward.
The belt outlet engages in five various
Warning! G
positions.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
Adjusting belt outlet lower your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
Press and hold release button 1.
sciousness and lead to death.
Slide belt outlet in desired position.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
Let go of release button 1.
(such as garage) which are not properly ven-
tilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes
Please comply with the instructions for
are entering the vehicle while driving, have
 Proper use of seat belts ( page 42).
the cause determined and corrected imme-
diately. If you must drive under these condi-
tions, drive only with at least one window
Gearshift pattern for automatic
fully open.
transmission
P Park position with gear selector lever
lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
For more information, see  Automatic
transmission ( page 140).
43
Getting started
Driving
Starting Starting difficulties Parking brake
Make sure the gear selector lever is set If the engine does not start as described,
to P. carry out the following steps:
Do not depress accelerator. Turn SmartKey in starter switch to
position 0 and repeat starting proce-
Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
dure.
position 3 and hold until the engine
starts ( page 33). Remember that extended starting at-
tempts can drain the battery.
i
Get a jump start ( page 313).
You can also use the  touch-start
If the engine does not start after several 1 Lever
function. Turn the SmartKey to
position 3 and release it again immedi- starting attempts, there could be a mal- 2 Button
ately. The engine then starts automati- function in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
cally.
Warning! G
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Depress the brake pedal.
Light Truck Center. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
The gear selector lever lock is released.
the vehicle.
For information on turning off the engine,
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
see  Turning off engine ( page 52).
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could release the parking brake,
which could result in an accident and/or se-
rious personal injury.
44
Getting started
Driving
Release the parking brake by lifting After a cold start, the automatic transmis-
!
lever 1 up slightly, pressing button 2 sion shifts at a higher revolution. This al-
In order to avoid damaging the trans-
on the lever and moving lever 1 down lows the catalytic converter to reach its
mission,
to the stop. operating temperature earlier.
wait for the gear selection process
The warning lamp ; (USA only) or
to complete before setting the vehi- !
3 (Canada only) in the instrument
cle in motion.
Do not run cold engine at high engine
cluster goes out.
speeds. Running a a cold engine at high
place the gear selector lever in
engine speeds may shorten the service
position R only when the vehicle is
Driving
life of the engine.
stopped.
Depress the brake pedal.
Move gear selector lever to position D i
Release the brake pedal.
or R.
You can open the doors from inside at
Carefully depress the accelerator.
any time. Open doors only when the
Once the vehicle is in motion, the auto-
conditions are safe to do so.
Warning! G
matic central locking system engages
You can deactivate the automatic
and the locking knobs drop down.
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le-
locking using the control system
ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high-
! ( page 133).
er than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
If you hear a warning signal when driv-
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
ing off, you have forgotten to release
!
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
the parking brake.
Simultaneously depressing the acceler-
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
ator pedal and applying the brake re-
Release the parking brake.
someone or something. Only shift into gear
duces engine performance and causes
when the engine is idling normally and when
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
45
Getting started
Driving
Switching on headlamps Turn signals and high beam
Warning! G
The combination switch is located on the
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
left of the steering column.
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of loss of control.
For more information, see  Driving instruc-
tions ( page 207).
For information on off-road driving, see Exterior lamp switch
 Off-road driving ( page 213).
1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on
Combination switch
Turn the switch to B. 1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left
For more information, see  Exterior lamp
switch ( page 104). Press combination switch up 1 or
down 2.
The switch is automatically canceled
when the steering wheel is turned a
sufficient degree.
46
Getting started
Driving
Windshield wipers Switching on windshield wipers
i
To signal minor directional changes,
Turn the combination switch to the de-
The combination switch is located on the
move combination switch to point of
sired position depending on the inten-
left of the steering column.
resistance only and release. The turn
sity of the rain.
signal blinks three times.
0 Windshield wipers off
I Intermittent wiping
High beam
II Normal wiper speed
Push the combination switch forward.
III Fast wiper speed
The high beam headlamp
indicator A in the instrument clus-
i
ter comes on.
The intermittent wiping interval de-
For more information, see  High beam
pends on the wetness of the wind-
flasher ( page 108).
Combination switch
shield. Wiping will not occur with a
front door open.
1 Single wipe
2 Switching on windshield wipers
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
47
Getting started
Driving
Single wipe
! !
Do not leave windshield wipers in inter- If anything blocks the windshield wip-
Press switch briefly in the direction of
mittent setting when vehicle is taken to ers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
arrow 1.
an automatic car wash or during wind- immediately.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
shield cleaning. Wipers will operate in
For safety reasons, withdraw
without washer fluid.
the presence of water sprayed on the
SmartKey from starter switch be-
windshield, and wipers may be dam-
fore attempting to remove any
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
aged as a result.
blockage.
Push switch in the direction of
The switch should not be left in inter-
Remove blockage.
arrow 1 past the resistance point.
mittent setting as the wipers will wipe
Turn the windshield wipers on
the windshield once every time the en- The windshield wipers operate with
again.
gine is started. Dust that accumulates washer fluid until the switch is re-
on the windshield might scratch the leased.
If windshield wipers fail to function at
glass and/or damage the wiper blades
all in switch position I,
For information on filling up the washer
when wiping occurs on a dry wind-
reservoir, see  Windshield/rear window
set the combination switch to the
shield.
washer system and headlamp cleaning
next highest wiper speed
system ( page 234).
have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
48
Getting started
Driving
Rear window wiper/washer Wiping with windshield washer fluid
i
The rear window wiper will also auto- Press and hold lower half 3 of the
The rear window wiper/washer switch is
matically engage if
switch.
located on the upper part of the center
the windshield wipers are engaged
The wiper operates with washer fluid.
console.
The rear window will be wiped for ap-
the gear selector lever is placed
proximately another five seconds after
in R  Reverse
the switch is released.
For information on filling up the washer
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
reservoir, see  Windshield/rear window
washer system and headlamp cleaning
Interval wiping
system ( page 234).
Switching on
Press upper half 1 of the switch.
1 Interval wiping on/off
The indicator lamp 2 comes on.
2 Indicator lamp
3 Simultaneous operation of wiper and
Switching off
washer
Press upper half 1 of the switch
again.
The indicator lamp 2 goes out.
49
Getting started
Driving
Problems while driving The coolant temperature is over 248�F In case of accident
(120�C)
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
The engine runs erratically and misfires
Do not start the engine under any cir-
cooling the engine.
cumstances.
An ignition cable may be damaged.
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible
Notify local fire and/or police authori-
The engine electronics may not be op-
and turn off the engine. Allow engine
ties.
erating properly.
and coolant to cool down.
If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
Unburned gasoline may have entered
Check the coolant level and add cool-
termined:
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
ant if necessary ( page 232).
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Give very little gas.
i
Light Truck Center.
Have the problem repaired by an au-
Excessive coolant temperatures trigger
If no damage can be determined on the
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
a warning message in the multifunction
Center as soon as possible.
major assemblies
display ( page 269).
fuel system
engine mount
Start the engine in the usual manner.
50
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive. Parking brake
Warning! G
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
Warning! G
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before re-
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
moving the SmartKey from the starter
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when
sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
the SmartKey is removed.
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
1 Lever
Warning! G 2 Button
Pull the parking brake lever up as many
notches as possible.
Pull lever 1 up as many notches as
With the engine not running, there is no
Move the gear selector lever to
possible.
power assistance for the brake and steering
position P.
systems. In this case, it is important to keep When the engine is running, the warn-
Slowly release brake pedal.
in mind that a considerably higher degree of ing lamp ; (USA only) or 3
When parked on an incline, turn front
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve- (Canada only) in the instrument cluster
wheels towards the road curb.
hicle. will be illuminated.
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove.
Take the SmartKey and lock vehicle
when leaving.
51
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off engine
Warning! G Warning! G
Place the gear selector lever in
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se-
position P.
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock lector lever not fully engaged in position P is
i
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattend- dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
ed in the vehicle, or with access to an un- position P alone may not prevent your vehi- Always set the parking brake in addi-
locked vehicle. Children could release the cle from moving, possibly hitting people or tion to shifting to position P.
parking brake and/or move the gear selec- objects.
On slopes, turn the front wheels to-
tor lever from position P, either of which
Always set the parking brake in addition to
wards the road curb.
could result in an accident and/or serious
shifting to position P.
personal injury.
Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
position 0 and remove it.
towards the road curb.
The immobilizer is activated.
Switching off headlamps
i
The SmartKey can only be pulled out
Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
when:
( page 46).
it has been turned to position 0 in
For more information, see  Exterior lamp
the starter switch
switch ( page 104).
the gear selector lever for the auto-
matic transmission is in position P
you are not depressing the brake
pedal
52
Getting started
Parking and locking
Press the seat belt release button 3
Warning! G Warning! G
( page 41).
Allow the retractor to completely re-
To prevent possible personal injury, always When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
wind the seat belt by guiding the latch
keep hands and fingers away from the door SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
plate.
openings when closing the doors. Be espe- your vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
cially careful when small children are tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
!
around. unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
With the SmartKey removed and the
cle equipment may cause an accident
Before closing doors, ensure there is no pos-
driver s door open, a warning sounds if
and/or serious personal injury.
sibility of someone getting caught in a door
the vehicles exterior lamps are not
during closing.
switched off.
For more information, see  Locking and
unlocking ( page 86).
After exiting the vehicle, press the lock
button 9 on the SmartKey
( page 32).
The locking knobs on the doors move
down.
53
54
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving and safety systems
Anti-theft systems
55
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most im- The restraint systems are The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
portant facts about the restraint systems cluster ( page 25) comes on:
Seat belts
of the vehicle.
for about four seconds when you turn
Emergency tensioning device
the SmartKey in the starter switch to
Airbags
position 1.
Child seats
for about four seconds when you start
the engine by turning the SmartKey.
Child seat recognition
Lower anchors and tethers for children
i
(LATCH)
The 1 indicator lamp remains lit if
the SmartKey is turned to position 2
As independent systems, their protective
and left there. The indicator lamp will
effects work in conjunction with each oth-
go out when you start the engine.
er.
i
The 1 indicator lamp goes out shortly
For information on infants and children
after you start the engine. This shows that
traveling with you in the vehicle and re- the restraint systems are operational.
straint systems for infants and chil-
dren, see  Children in the vehicle
( page 65).
56
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
A malfunction in the system has been de- Airbags
Warning! G
tected if the 1 indicator lamp:
fails to extinguish after approximately
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
Warning! G
four seconds.
comes on during driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS may not be operational.
does not come on at all. Airbags are designed to reduce the potential
For your safety, we strongly recommend
of injury in certain frontal (front airbags) im-
comes on after the engine was started
that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
pacts, which may cause significant injuries.
or while driving.
Light Truck Center immediately to have the
However, no system available today can to-
For safety reasons, we strongly recom-
system checked; otherwise the SRS may not
tally eliminate injuries and fatalities.
mend that you visit an authorized
be activated when needed in an accident,
The activation of the SRS temporarily releas-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center imme-
which could result in serious or fatal injury,
es a small amount of dust from the airbags.
diately to have the system checked.
or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnec-
This dust, however, is neither injurious to
essarily which could also result in injury.
For more information, see  Practical hints
your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
( page 258). Improper work on the restraint systems, in- vehicle. The dust might cause some tempo-
cluding incorrect installation and removal,
rary breathing difficulty for people with asth-
can lead to possible injury through an unin- ma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
tended activation of the SRS.
you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
In addition, through improper work there is
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get
causing unintended airbag deployment.
fresh air by opening a window or door.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be per-
formed by qualified technicians. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
ter.
57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
Warning! G Warning! G
rearward, still permitting proper opera-
tion of vehicle controls. The distance
The service life of the passenger front airbag To reduce the risk of injury when the front
from the center of the driver s breast-
extends to the date indicated on the label lo- airbags inflate, it is very important for the
bone to the center of the airbag cover on
cated on the driver side B pillar. To provide driver and front passenger to always be in a
the steering wheel must be at least
continued reliability after that date, they properly seated position and to wear your
ten inches (25 cm) or more. You should
should be inspected by an authorized seat belt.
be able to accomplish this by a combina-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center at that tion of adjustments to the seat and
For maximum protection in the event of a
steering wheel. If you have any prob-
time and replaced when necessary.
collision always be in normal seated position
lems, please see your authorized
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
your seat belt and ensure it is properly posi-
Do not lean with your head or chest
tioned on your body ( page 62).
close to the steering wheel or dash-
Since the airbag inflates with considerable
board.
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
Keep hands on the outside of steering
on steering wheel position will help to keep
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in-
you at a safe distance from the airbag. Oc-
side the rim can increase the risk and
cupants who are unbelted, out of position or
potential severity of hand/arm injury
too close to the airbag can be seriously in-
when driver front airbag inflates.
jured by an airbag as it inflates with great
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
force in the blink of an eye:
possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
Sit properly belted in an upright position
with your back against the backrest.
58
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i
Always sit upright, properly use the seat
Warning! G
belts and appropriate size infant or child Airbags are designed to activate only in
restraint system.
certain frontal (front airbags) impacts
Accident research shows that the safest
which exceed preset thresholds.
Children 12 years old and under must
place for children in an automobile is in the
never ride in the front seat, except in a
rear seat. Should you choose to place a child Only during these types of impacts, if of
Mercedes-Benz authorized
12 years old or under in the front passenger sufficient severity to meet the deploy-
BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat,
seat of your vehicle, you must properly use ment thresholds, will they provide their
which operates with the BabySmartTM
a BabySmartTM child restraint which will supplemental protection.
system installed in the vehicle to deacti-
turn off the passenger front airbag
vate the passenger front airbag when it
The driver and passenger should al-
( page 68).
is properly installed. Otherwise they will
ways wear their seat belts. Otherwise it
be struck by the airbag when it inflates
is not possible for the airbags to pro-
in a crash. If this happens, serious or fa-
vide their supplemental protection.
tal injury will result.
In cases of other frontal impacts, an-
Failure to follow these instructions can re-
gled impacts, roll-overs, other side im-
sult in severe injuries to you or other occu-
pacts, rear collisions, or other
pants.
accidents, the airbags will not be acti-
If you sell your vehicle you are responsible
vated. The driver and passengers will
to make the buyer aware of these points.
then be protected by the fastened seat
Make sure to give the buyer this Operator s
belts.
Manual.
We caution you not to rely on the pres-
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automo-
ence of the airbags in order to avoid
tive Corp.
wearing your seat belt.
59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
Your vehicle was originally equipped
Airbags and emergency tensioning de-
emergency tensioning device and
with airbags that are designed to acti-
vices (ETDs) are designed to function on
airbag
vate in certain impacts exceeding a
a one-time-only basis. An airbag or ETD
preset threshold to reduce the poten- that was activated must be replaced.
tial and severity of injury. It is important
Warning! G Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
to your safety and that of your passen-
They could tear.
ger that you replace deployed airbags
Damaged seat belts or belts that were
Do not make any modification that could
and repair any malfunctioning airbags
highly stressed in an accident must be
change the effectiveness of the belts.
to make sure the vehicle will continue replaced and their anchoring points
An airbag system component within the
to provide supplemental crash protec- must also be checked. Use only belts in-
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag
stalled or supplied by an authorized
tion for occupants.
has inflated. Do not touch.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Improper work on the system, including
No modifications of any kind may be
incorrect installation and removal, can
made to any components or wiring of
lead to possible injury through an unin-
the SRS. This includes changing or re-
tended activation of the SRS.
moving any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges, etc. over the steering
wheel hub, passenger front airbag cov-
er, or door trim panels, and installation
of additional electrical/electronic
equipment on or near SRS components
and wiring. Keep area between airbags
and occupants free from objects (e.g.
packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
60
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Front airbags
In addition, through improper work
Warning! G
there is a risk of rendering the SRS inop-
erative or causing unintended airbag de-
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
ployment. Work on the SRS must
comes on while driving, the SRS may not be
therefore only be performed by qualified
operational. For your safety, we strongly
technicians. Contact an authorized
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immedi-
For your protection and the protection
ately to have the system checked; otherwise
of others, when scrapping the airbag
the SRS may not be activated when needed
unit or emergency tensioning device,
in an accident, which could result in serious
our safety instructions must be fol-
or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpect-
lowed. These instructions are available
1 Driver airbag
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz edly and unnecessarily which could also re-
2 Passenger front airbag
Light Truck Center.
sult in injury.
Driver and passenger airbags are de-
Given the considerable deployment
ployed:
speed and the textile structure of the
airbags, there is the possibility of abra-
in the event of a frontal impact
sions or other injuries resulting from air-
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
bag deployment.
threshold
When you sell your vehicle we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator s Manual.
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The airbags will not deploy in impacts Seat belts For more information, see  Fastening the
which do not exceed the system s deploy- seat belt ( page 40).
When the engine is started, the seat-belt
ment thresholds. You will then be protect-
i
non-usage warning lamp < illuminates
ed by the fastened seat belts.
to remind you and your passengers to fas- For information on infants and children
The passenger front airbag will only be de-
ten your seat belts. If the driver s seat belt traveling with you in the vehicle and re-
ployed if:
is not fastened before the engine is start- straint systems for infants and chil-
the passenger seat is occupied
ed, the seat belt non-usage warning dren, see  Children in the vehicle
lamp < illuminates and a warning ( page 65).
the 7 indicator lamp in the center
chime sounds for approximately six sec-
console is not lit ( page 68)
onds when the engine is started.
the impact exceeds a preset deploy-
The use of seat belts and infant and child
ment threshold
restraint systems is required by law in all
50 states, the District of Columbia and all
!
Canadian provinces. Even where this is not
Do not place objects heavier than
the case, all vehicle occupants should have
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
their seat belts fastened whenever the ve-
seat. This could cause the passenger
hicle is in motion.
front airbag to deploy in a crash which
exceeds the system s deployment
threshold.
62
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving Never ride in a moving vehicle with the back- Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
off. Always make sure your passengers are rest reclined. Sitting in an excessively re- stressed in an accident must be replaced
properly restrained, even those sitting in the clined position can be dangerous. You could and their anchoring points must also be
rear and pregnant women. slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you checked.
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po- Only use seat belts which have been ap-
the abdomen or neck. That could cause se-
sition your seat belt greatly increases your proved by Mercedes-Benz.
rious or even fatal injuries. The backrest and
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
Do not make any modifications to the seat
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
accident. You and your passengers should
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
wearer is in an upright position and the belt
always wear seat belts.
or to failure.
is properly positioned on the body.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
Have all work carried out only by qualified
can be considerably more severe without
technicians. Contact an authorized
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Warning! G
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
or killed.
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re-
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
strained with a separate seat belt.
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are prop-
erly wearing their seat belts.
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Never wear the shoulder belt under your Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
Warning! G
arm, against your neck or off your shoul- crash, you wouldn t have the full width
der. In a crash, your body would move of the belt to manage impact forces. The
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
too far forward. That would increase the twisted belt against your body could
Seat belts can only work when used chance of head and neck injuries. The cause injuries.
properly. Never wear seat belts in any belt would also apply too much force to
Pregnant women should also use a
other way than as described in this sec- the ribs or abdomen, which could se-
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
tion, as that could result in serious inju- verely injure internal organs such as
should be positioned as low as possible
ries in case of an accident. your liver or spleen.
on the hips to avoid any possible pres-
Each occupant should wear their seat Never wear belts over rigid or breakable sure on the abdomen.
belt at all times, because seat belts help objects in or on your clothing, such as
Never place your feet on the instrument
reduce the likelihood of and potential eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these
panel or on the seat. Always keep both
severity of injuries in accidents, includ- might cause injuries.
feet on the floor in front of the seat.
ing rollovers. The integrated restraint
Position the lap belt as low as possible
system includes SRS (driver airbag and
on your hips and not across the abdo-
passenger front airbag), ETD (seat belt
men. If the belt is positioned across your
emergency tensioning device for driv-
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
er s seat, front passenger seat and the
in a crash.
outboard passenger seats). The system
Never use a seat belt for more than one
is designed to enhance the protection
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
offered to properly belted occupants in
belt around a person and another per-
certain frontal (front airbags) impacts
son or other objects.
which exceed preset deployment
thresholds.
64
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device (ETD), Children in the vehicle
Warning! G
seat belt force limiter
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
The seat belts for the front and rear outer
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
the vehicle:
seats are equipped with emergency ten-
was activated must be replaced.
Secure the child using an infant or child
sioning devices and belt force limiters.
When disposing of the emergency tension-
restraint appropriate to the age and
The ETD is designed to activate only when
ing device, our safety instructions must be
size of the child and recommended for
the seat belt is fastened and in the follow-
followed. These are available at your autho-
use by Mercedes-Benz.
ing cases:
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Make sure the infant or child is proper-
in frontal or rear-end impacts exceed-
ly secured by a belt at all times while
ing a preset severity level
!
the vehicle is in motion.
if the restraint systems are operational Do not place objects heavier than
Infant and child restraint seats and infor-
and functioning correctly, see 20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
mation on choosing an appropriate re-
1 indicator lamp ( page 56) seat. This could cause the passenger
straint system can be obtained from any
front airbag to deploy in a crash which
In an impact, emergency tensioning devic-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
exceeds the system's deployment
es remove slack from the belts in such a
threshold.
way that the seat belts fit more snugly
against the body.
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Infant and child restraint systems
i !
For more information on child seats The use of infant or child restraints is
Use only a BabySmartTM1 compatible child
with mounting fittings for tether an- required by law in all 50 states, the
restraint for the front passenger seat in
chorages, see  Installation of infant District of Columbia, the U.S. territo-
this vehicle.
and child restraint system ries and all Canadian provinces.
We recommend that all infants and
( page 69).
Infants and small children should be
children be properly restrained at all times
while the vehicle is in motion. All lap-shoul- For information on LATCH-type child seated in an appropriate infant or child
seat anchors, see ( page 70). restraint system properly secured by a
der belts except the driver s seat belt have
lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
special seat belt retractors for secure fas-
child restraint lower anchorage system
tening of child restraints.
that complies with U.S. Federal Motor
Warning! G
To fasten a child restraint, follow manufac-
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
turer s instructions for mounting child re-
Never release the seat belt buckle while the and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
straints. Then pull shoulder belt out
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat Standards 213 and 210.2.
completely and let it retract. During the
belt retractor will be deactivated.
A statement by the child restraint man-
seat belt retraction a ratcheting sound can
ufacturer of compliance with this stan-
be heard to indicate that the special seat
dard can be found on the instruction
belt retractor is activated. The belt is now
label on the restraint and in the instruc-
locked. Push down on child restraint to
tion manual provided with the restraint.
take up any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual man-
ner.
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automo-
tive Corp.
66
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When using any infant or child restraint
Infants and small children should never
Warning! G
system, be sure to carefully read and
share a seat belt with another occupant.
follow all manufacturer s instructions
During an accident, they could be crushed
Children 12 years old and under must never
for installation and use.
between the occupant and seat belt.
ride in the front seat, except in a
Please read and observe warning labels
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant
compatible child seat, which operates with significantly increased if the child restraints
or child restraints.
the BabySmartTM System installed in the ve- are not properly secured in the vehicle and
hicle to deactivate the passenger front air- the child is not properly secured in the child
bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise restraint.
they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury can result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle s
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufactur-
er s instructions.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation The 7 indicator lamp located in the
Warning! G
system center console will be illuminated, except
with the SmartKey removed or in the start-
Children too big for child restraint systems
er switch position 0.
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest i
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
The system does not deactivate the
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
emergency tensioning device.
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
Self-test BabySmartTM without special
belt fits properly without a booster.
child seat installed
When the child restraint is not in use, re-
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
7 indicator lamp
move it from the vehicle or secure it with the
switch to position 1 or 2, the
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
Special BabySmartTM1 compatible child
7 indicator lamp located in the center
becoming a projectile in the event of an ac-
seats, designed for use with the
console comes on for approximately
cident.
Mercedes-Benz system and available at
six seconds and then goes out.
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
If the indicator lamp should not come on or
Center are required for use with the
hicle, even if the children are secured in a
is continuously lit, the system is not func-
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system.
child restraint system. Unsupervised chil-
tioning. You must see an authorized
With the special child seat properly in-
dren in a child restraint system may use ve-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center before
stalled, the passenger front airbag will not
hicle equipment and may cause serious
seating any child on the front passenger
deploy.
personal injury.
seat.
For more information, see  Practical hints
section ( page 259).
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automo-
tive Corp.
68
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Installation of infant and child restraint
Warning! G Warning! G
system
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation sys- Make sure to check the indicator every time
tem will ONLY work with a special child seat you use the special system child seat.
designed to operate with it. It will not work Should the light go out while the restraint is
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM installed, please check installation. If the
compatible. light remains out, do not use the
BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
Never place anything between seat cushion
on the front passenger seat until the system
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
has been repaired.
the effectiveness of the deactivation sys-
tem. The bottom of the child seat must
make full contact with the passenger seat 1 Anchorage ring for rear left side seat
Warning! G
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat 2 Anchorage ring for rear right side seat
could cause injuries to the child in case of an 3 Anchorage ring for rear center seat
Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
accident, instead of protecting the child.
phones and like electronic devices on the
Follow the manufacturer s instructions for
front passenger seat. Signals from such de-
installation of special child seats.
vices may interfere with the BabySmartTM
When using a BabySmartTM compatible
system. Such signal interference may cause
child seat on the front passenger seat, the
the 7 indicator lamp not to come on dur-
passenger front airbag will not deploy only if
ing self-test or be continuously lit, indicating
the 7 indicator lamp remains illuminat- that the system is not functioning.
ed.
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Guide top tether strap between head Child seat anchors  LATCH type
i
restraint and top of seat back. Head
For safety, make sure the hook is at- This vehicle is provided with two LATCH
restraint must be installed and posi-
tached to the ring beyond the safety
(LOWER Anchors and Tethers for CHil-
tioned such that the top tether strap
catch, as illustrated.
dren) type anchors (at each of the outer
can pass freely between the head re-
rear seats) for installation of a LATCH child
straint and top of seat back.
seat with matching mounting fittings.
When mounting a tether strap on the Warning! G
rear outer seats, reinstall the cargo
Use only the described anchorage rings for
compartment cover blind ( page 176)
the respective child seat. Other lashing eye-
and optional partition net
lets could tear in the case of an accident.
( page 178).
Make sure
the fastening straps are not crossed or
twisted.
the hook is properly attached and is
closed.
Anchors
Install a LATCH type child seat according
to the manufacturer s instructions.
Install child seat according to manufac-
turer s instructions.
4 Hook
Securely fasten hook 4 to anchorage
ring.
70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Blocking rear door window operation
i
Warning! G
With a child seat installed in the left
The override switch is located in the driv-
rear seat, the seat belt for the center
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
er s door.
seat occupied by a passenger must op-
loose during an accident.
erate freely.
Damaged or impact-damaged child seats or
Non-LATCH type child seats may also
child seat mounting fittings must be re-
be used and can be installed using the
placed.
vehicle s seat belt system. Install child
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
seat according to the manufacturer s
hicle, even if the children are secured in a
instructions.
child restraint system.
Children too big for child restraint systems
Warning! G must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
1 Override switch
Install child seat according to manufactur- and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
er s instructions.
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
Activating override switch
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
The child seat must be firmly attached in the
Slide override switch 1 to the right.
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
right and left side anchors.
belt fits properly without a booster.
A dot becomes visible. The functions in
the rear are disabled.
i
Operation of the rear windows with the
switches located in the driver s door is
still possible.
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure them-
selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-
dow opening.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattend-
ed in the vehicle, or with access to an un-
locked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment can cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
Deactivating override switch
Slide override switch 1 to the left.
The functions in the rear are enabled
again.
For more information on power windows,
see  Power windows ( page 164).
72
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
Panic alarm
An audible alarm and blinking turn signal
i
lamps will operate for approximately
For operation in the USA only: This de-
2� minutes.
vice complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
To activate: Press and hold button 1
following two conditions:
for at least one second.
This device may not cause harmful
To deactivate: Press button 1 again or
interference, and
insert SmartKey in starter switch.
this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
1 �button
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user s authority
to operate the equipment.
73
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
Driving and safety systems
In this section you will find information on ABS
Warning! G
the following driving safety systems:
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
The following factors increase the risk of ac-
Warning! G
cidents:
BAS (Brake Assist System)
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
Excessive speed, especially in turns
4-ETS (Electronic Traction System)
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
Wet and slippery road surfaces
EBB (Electronic Brake Booster)
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
Following another vehicle too closely
ABS and significantly reduces braking effec-
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
The ABS, BAS, ESP and 4-ETS cannot reduce tiveness.
i this risk.
In winter operation, the maximum ef-
Always adjust your driving style to the pre- The ABS regulates the brake pressure so
fectiveness of the ABS, ESP, EBB and
that the wheels do not lock during braking.
vailing road and weather conditions.
4-ETS is only achieved with winter tires
This allows you to maintain the ability to
(M+S tires), or snow chains as re-
steer your vehicle.
quired.
The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions (as long as the
differential locks are not engaged).
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
the regulating mode. Keep firm and steady
pressure on the brake pedal while experi-
encing the pulsation.
74
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure Braking LOW RANGE ABS
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
At the instant one of the wheels is about to During off-road driving a special low range
namely braking power and the ability to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the system for the antilock brake system (ABS)
steer the vehicle.
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in is operational with transfer case in position
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will re- the regulating mode. LOW ( page 145).
spond even with light brake pressure. The
Keep firm and steady pressure on the An improved braking action (dig-in effect)
pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
brake pedal while experiencing the pul- is obtained for vehicle speeds up to
of hazardous road conditions and func-
sation. 37 mph (60 km/h) through a change in the
tions as a reminder to take extra care while
ABS control function.
driving.
Emergency brake maneuver
For more information, see  Practical hints
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
Keep continuous full pressure on the ( page 252).
cluster ( page 24) comes on when you
brake pedal.
turn the SmartKey to position 2. It goes
out when the engine is running.
i
If the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS,
EBB, ESP and 4-ETS are also switched
off.
Normal driving and braking functions
are still available.
75
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
BAS
Warning! G Warning! G
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
emergency situations. If you apply the
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
it increase braking or steering efficiency be- it increase braking efficiency beyond that af-
provides full brake boost, thereby poten-
yond that afforded by the condition of the forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes
tially reducing braking distance. Apply con-
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction af- and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS
tinuous full braking pressure until the
forded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, cannot prevent accidents, including those
emergency braking situation is over. The
including those resulting from excessive resulting from excessive speed in turns, fol-
ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
speed in turns, following another vehicle too lowing another vehicle too closely, or aqua-
When you release the brake pedal the
closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, atten- planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci- driver can prevent accidents. The capabili-
is then deactivated.
dents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped ties of a BAS equipped vehicle must never
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck- With the BAS malfunctioning, the ABS, ESP
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
less or dangerous manner which could jeop- and 4-ETS are also switched off.
manner which could jeopardize the user s
ardize the user s safety or the safety of safety or the safety of others.
others.
For more information, see  Practical hints
( page 261).
76
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
4-ETS
!
Warning! G
The engine must be shut off when
The 4-ETS improves vehicle s ability to uti-
the parking brake is being tested on
When you see the ESP warning lamp v
lize available traction, especially under
a brake test dynamometer.
flashing in the instrument cluster, then pro-
slippery road conditions. The brakes are
ceed as follows:
applied to the spinning wheel and power is
the vehicle is being towed with one
allowed to flow to the wheel(s) with trac-
While driving off, apply as little throttle axle raised.
tion.
as possible.
Otherwise, the 4-ETS will engage the
The 4-ETS function is available between ve- While driving ease up on the accelera-
brakes and seriously damage the brake
tor.
hicle speeds of 0 mph (km/h) and 37 mph
system.
(60 km/h).
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
The ESP warning lamp v in the instru- For more information, see  Practical hints
Failure to observe these guidelines could
ment cluster ( page 24) comes on when ( page 257).
cause the vehicle to skid.
you turn the SmartKey to position 2. It
goes out when the engine is running.
The 4-ETS cannot prevent accidents result-
ing from excessive speed.
The ESP warning lamp v starts to flash
at any vehicle speed, as soon as the tires
lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.
77
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
EBB ESP
Warning! G
The EBB enhances braking effectiveness The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Never switch off the ESP when you see the
by allowing the rear brakes to supply a monitors the vehicle s traction (force of ad-
ESP warning lamp v flashing in the in-
greater proportion of the braking effort in hesive friction between the tires and the
strument cluster. In this case proceed as fol-
straight line braking circumstances with- road surface) and handling.
lows:
out a loss of vehicle stability.
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spin-
While driving off, apply as little throttle
ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By ap-
as possible.
plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to While driving ease up on the accelera-
tor.
stabilize the vehicle.
Adapt your speed and driving style to
The ESP warning lamp v in the instru-
the prevailing road conditions.
ment cluster ( page 24) flashes when the
Failure to observe these guidelines could
ESP is engaged.
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP warning lamp v comes on
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
when you turn the SmartKey to position 2.
from excessive speed.
It goes out when the engine is running.
78
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
Switching off the ESP
!
Warning! G
The engine must be shut off when
Warning! G
the parking brake is being tested on
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
a brake test dynamometer.
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
The ESP should not be switched off during
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
the vehicle is being towed with one
normal driving other than in the circum-
cannot prevent accidents, including those
axle raised.
stances described below. Disabling of the
resulting from excessive speed in turns, fol-
system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-
Otherwise, the ESP will engage the
lowing another vehicle too closely, or aqua-
dard driving maneuvers.
brakes and seriously damage the brake
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
system.
driver can prevent accidents. The capabili-
To improve the vehicle s traction, turn off
ties of a ESP equipped vehicle must never be
the ESP in driving situations where it would
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
i
be advantageous to have the drive wheels
which could jeopardize the user s safety or
The ABS, BAS and ESP are automatical-
spin and thus cut into surfaces for better
the safety of others.
ly switched off when the differential
grip such as:
locks are switched on ( page 150).
starting out on slippery surfaces and in
!
deep snow in conjunction with snow
Driving the vehicle with varied size tires
chains.
will cause the wheels to rotate at differ-
ent speeds, possibly causing the ESP to
sand or gravel.
activate. For this reason, all wheels, in-
when driving off-road.
cluding the spare wheel, must have the
same tire outside diameter. When the ESP is turned off
engine torque is not limited.
the drive wheels can spin.
79
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
The ESP control switch is located in the up- Even if the ESP has been turned off, it is
!
per center console. still active in the following situations:
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period of time with the ESP
when braking
switched off. This may cause serious
at vehicle speeds up to approximately
damage to the drivetrain which is not
37 mph (60 km/h), if one wheel reach-
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
es the grip limit, e.g. when the street is
Warranty.
icy on one side
The brake is applied until the wheel re-
i
gains sufficient traction.
Turn ESP on immediately if the afore-
If one or more drive wheels are spinning,
mentioned circumstances do not apply
the ESP warning lamp v in the instru-
anymore.
ESP on/off
ment cluster flashes, regardless of the
Press upper half of switch.
speed.
ESP is deactivated and the ESP warning
i
lamp v in the instrument cluster
If the ESP is switched off, it will be au-
comes on.
tomatically activated when exceeding a
vehicle speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) or
exceeding a severity threshold of side
acceleration.
80
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
Warning! G
When the ESP warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP is
switched off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
ing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.
Switching on the ESP
Press lower half of switch.
The ESP warning lamp v in the in-
strument cluster goes out. You are now
again in normal driving mode.
For more information, see  Practical hints
( page 257).
81
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer Anti-theft alarm
i
If the alarm stays on for more than
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized Once the alarm system has been armed, a
20 seconds, an emergency call is initi-
persons from starting your vehicle. visual and audible alarm is triggered when
ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys-
someone:
tem ( page 190) provided Tele Aid
Activating
opens a door service was subscribed to and properly
Removing the SmartKey from the starter activated, and that necessary cellular
opens the tailgate
switch activates the immobilizer. service and GPS coverage are avail-
opens the hood
able.
Deactivating
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
element (a door, for example) is immedi- Arming the alarm system
Inserting the SmartKey in the starter
ately closed.
switch deactivates the immobilizer.
The alarm system is armed after locking
the vehicle with the SmartKey. The turn
The alarm system will also be triggered
i
signal lamps blink three times to indicate
when
In case the engine cannot be started
that the alarm system is activated. A red
someone attempts to raise the vehicle
(yet the vehicle s battery is charged),
lamp in the tow-away alarm switch begins
the system is not operational. Contact
the vehicle is opened with the mechan-
to blink after arming the alarm system
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
ical key
( page 27).
Truck Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
82
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Canceling the alarm Tow-away alarm
i
If the turn signal lamps do not blink
To cancel the alarm:
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
three times, one of the following ele-
Press the R
or 9 button on the
and audible alarm will be triggered when
ments may not be properly closed:
SmartKey.
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
a door
or
i
the tailgate
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
The tow-away protection alarm is trig-
the hood
switch.
gered, for example, if the vehicle is lift-
ed on one side.
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initi-
Disarming the alarm system
ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys-
tem provided Tele Aid service was
The alarm system is disarmed when you
subscribed to and properly activated,
unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey. The
and that necessary cellular service and
turn signal lamps blink once to indicate
GPS coverage are available.
that the alarm system is deactivated.
83
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Arming tow-away alarm The switch is located on the center con- Press upper half 1 of the switch.
sole.
When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away Indicator lamp 2 in the switch comes
alarm is automatically armed. on briefly.
When you unlock your vehicle, the Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey.
tow-away protection disarms
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed un-
automatically.
til you lock your vehicle again.
Disarming tow-away alarm
Canceling the tow-away alarm
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm
To cancel the alarm:
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm be-
Press the R
or 9 button on the
fore towing the vehicle, or when parking on
1 Tow-away alarm off switch SmartKey.
a surface subject to movement, such as a
2 Indicator lamp
ferry or auto train.
or
Turn off the ignition and remove the
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
SmartKey.
switch.
i
You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
while the ignition is turned on.
84
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Transfer case
Differential locks
Good visibility
Climate control
Power windows
Sliding/pop-up roof
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
85
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking
In the  Controls in detail section you will SmartKey
find detailed information on how to oper-
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
ate the equipment installed in your vehicle.
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
If you are already familiar with the basic
a removable mechanical key. The locking
functions of your vehicle, this section will
tabs for the mechanical key portion of the
be of particular interest to you.
two SmartKeys are a different color to help
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
distinguish each key unit.
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
The SmartKey provides an extended oper-
 Getting started section of this manual.
ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
The corresponding page numbers are giv-
SmartKey with remote controls
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
en at the beginning of each segment.
1 9 Lock button
you are in close proximity to it.
2 Locking tab for mechanical key
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
3 R
Unlock button
the doors
4 Battery check lamp
5 � Panic button ( page 73)
the tailgate
the fuel filler flap i
You can also open and close the power
windows ( page 165) and slid-
ing/pop-up roof ( page 167) using
the SmartKey.
86
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Selective setting Restoring to factory setting
!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish Press and hold buttons R
and 9
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of
to reprogram the SmartKey so that simultaneously for about six seconds
electromagnetic radiation.
pressing R
only unlocks the driver s until the battery check lamp 4 blinks
door and the fuel filler flap. twice.
Factory setting
Press and hold buttons R
and 9
simultaneously for about five seconds
Warning! G
Global unlocking
until battery check lamp 4 blinks
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
Press button R
. twice.
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
The SmartKey will then function as fol-
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattend-
lows:
locking knobs in the doors move up.
ed in the vehicle, or with access to an un-
The vehicle will lock again automatically
locked vehicle. It is possible for children to
Unlocking driver s door and fuel filler
within approximately 40 seconds of un-
open a locked door from the inside, which
flap
locking if neither door nor tailgate is
could result in an accident and/or serious
opened, the SmartKey is not inserted in Press button R
once.
personal injury.
the starter switch, or the central locking
switch is not activated. Global unlocking
Press button R
twice.
Global locking
Press button 9 . Global locking
Press button 9 .
All turn signal lamps blink three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down.
87
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Checking the batteries Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
!
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
Press button 9 or R
. If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
vehicle with the SmartKey, then the
you should do the following:
Battery check lamp 4 comes on brief-
batteries in the SmartKey are dis-
ly to indicate that the SmartKey batter- Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
charged, the SmartKey is malfunction-
ies are in order. authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
ing or the vehicle battery is drained.
Center.
!
Check the batteries in the Smart-
Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
Key ( page 88) and replace them if If battery check lamp 4 does not
mechanical key immediately to your
necessary ( page 288). come on briefly during check, then the
car insurance company.
SmartKey batteries are discharged.
Use the mechanical key to unlock
If necessary have the mechanical lock
the doors ( page 287). Replace the batteries ( page 288).
replaced.
Have the vehicle battery and the You can obtain the required batteries
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
battery connections checked by an at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center will be glad to supply you
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
with a replacement.
Truck Center ( page 311).
i
Use the mechanical key to lock the
doors and the tailgate
If the batteries are checked within sig-
( page 288).
nal range of the vehicle, pressing the
button 9 or R
will lock or unlock
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, con-
the vehicle accordingly.
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
88
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the doors from the inside Opening the tailgate from the outside
i
If the vehicle has previously been
You can open a locked door from the in-
locked from the outside with the
side. Open door only when conditions are
SmartKey, opening a door from the in-
safe to do so.
side will trigger the alarm.
To cancel the alarm do one the follow-
ing:
Press the R
or 9 button on
the SmartKey.
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
1 Handle
switch.
2 Lock cylinder
Press lock cylinder 2 and pull on tail-
Opening the tailgate
gate handle 1.
1 Locking knob
Open the tailgate to the side.
2 Inside door handle
Warning! G
Pull on door handle 2.
i
The tailgate swings open to one side. Always
If the door was locked, locking knob 1 The vehicle must be unlocked.
make sure there is sufficient clearance for
moves up.
the tailgate.
Only drive with the tailgate closed as other-
wise exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
89
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the tailgate from inside Closing the tailgate Separately locking the tailgate
i
Warning! G
To deny any unauthorized person ac-
cess to the tailgate, lock it separately
To prevent possible personal injury, always
with the mechanical key. Leave only
keep hands and fingers away from the tail-
the SmartKey less its mechanical key
gate opening when closing the tailgate. Be
with the vehicle.
especially careful when small children are
around.
1 Locking knob
Warning! G
2 Inside door handle
Pull on door handle 2.
Only drive with the tailgate closed as other-
If door was locked, the locking knob 1 wise exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
moves up. interior.
Warning! G i
To prevent an inadvertent lockout, do
1 Neutral position
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
not place the SmartKey in the cargo
2 Locked
hicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
compartment.
ment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
90
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Close the tailgate ( page 90). Separately unlocking the tailgate Automatic central locking
Pull the mechanical key out of the
Pull the mechanical key out of the The doors and the tailgate automatically
SmartKey ( page 287).
SmartKey ( page 287). lock when the ignition is switched on and
Insert the mechanical key in the lock
the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
Insert the mechanical key in the lock
cylinder.
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
cylinder.
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
You can open a locked door from the in-
Turn the mechanical key to neutral
position 2.
side. Open door only when conditions are
position 1 ( page 90).
safe to do so.
The tailgate remains locked even when the
You can now open the tailgate
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
( page 89).
i
You can only cancel the separate tail- Warning! G
gate locking mode by means of the me-
Only drive with the tailgate closed as other-
chanical key.
wise exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
91
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking from the inside The central locking switch is located in the
i
center console.
The doors and the tailgate unlock auto-
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from in-
matically after an accident if the force
side using the central locking switches.
of the impact exceeds a preset thresh-
This can be useful, for example, if you want
old.
to unlock the passenger door from the in-
The vehicle automatically locks when
side or want to lock the vehicle before
the ignition is switched on and the
starting to drive.
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or un-
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
locked with the central locking switch.
more. You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle
Warning! G
Central locking switch
is pushed
1 Locking
is on a test stand
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
2 Unlocking
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattend-
You can deactivate the automatic locking
ed in the vehicle, or with access to an un-
using the control system ( page 133).
locked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
For information on towing the vehicle, see
equipment may cause an accident and/or
 Towing the vehicle ( page 315).
serious personal injury.
92
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking
i
You can open a locked door from the
Press central locking switch 1.
inside. Open door only when conditions
If all the doors and the tailgate are
are safe to do so.
closed, the vehicle locks.
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked using the SmartKey, it will not
Unlocking
unlock using the central locking switch.
Press central locking switch 2.
If the vehicle was previously locked
The vehicle unlocks.
with the central locking switch
while in the selective remote con-
trol mode, only the door opened
from the inside is unlocked.
while in the global remote control
mode, the complete vehicle is un-
locked when a door is opened from
the inside.
93
Controls in detail
Seats
Seats
For more information on seat adjustment, The easy-entry/exit feature can be
Warning! G
see the  Getting started section switched on or off in the individual setting
( page 34). menu CONVENIENCE - EASY-ENTRY FEATURE
You must ensure no one can become
ACTIVATE ( page 133).
trapped or injured by the moving steering
Easy-entry/exit feature
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is i
activated, the driver s door is being opened
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated To cancel steering wheel movement,
and the engine is turned off.
the steering wheel tilts upwards. do one the following:
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
This allows easier entry into and exit from Move the steering column stalk
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
the vehicle when the driver s door is ( page 22)
Children could open the driver s door and
opened. However, the engine must be
Press the memory button
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
turned off.
( page 102)
feature, which could result in an accident
When the SmartKey is inserted in the start-
and/or serious personal injury.
er switch and the driver s door is closed,
the steering wheel returns to the last set
position.
94
Controls in detail
Seats
Removing and installing front seat Installing front seat head restraint
i
head restraints
Tilt the seat backrest rearward for eas- Press switch 1 upwards and hold for
ier removal and installation of the head
about five seconds.
For more information on head restraint ad-
restraints.
Press the head restraint down until it
justment, see the  Getting started section
engages.
( page 36).
Front seat head restraints
Adjust head restraint to the desired po-
sition.
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly Synchronizing head restraints and seat
positioned head restraints. adjustment fore and aft for front seats
Adjust head restraint so that the head re-
If the power supply was interrupted (bat-
straint supports the back of the head at eye
tery disconnected or discharged), the head
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
restraints and the seat adjustment fore
to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
and aft are no longer adjusted automatical-
cident or similar situation.
ly.
1 Switch
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
The head restraints and the seat adjust-
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ment fore and aft must be resynchronized:
Removing front seat head restraint
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
Turn SmartKey in starter switch to
Press switch 1 upwards and hold until
position 2.
the head restraint is fully extended.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat.
Move the seat completely forward
Pull head restraint out.
( page 35) and the head restraint fully
down ( page 36) and hold the switch-
es for approximately one second.
95
Controls in detail
Seats
Rear seat head restraints Head restraint height Removing and installing rear seat head
restraints
Warning! G
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head re-
Adjust head restraint so that the head re-
straint supports the back of the head at eye
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
Manually adjust the height of the head re-
cident or similar situation.
cident or similar situation.
straint.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend- Push or pull on the head restraint.
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
dent.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat.
96
Controls in detail
Seats
Removing rear seat head restraints Multicontour seat*
The multicontour seat has a movable seat
cushion and inflatable air cushions built
into the seat backrest to provide additional
lumbar and side support.
The seat cushion movement and amount of
seat backrest cushion height and curva-
ture can be continuously varied with regu-
lators on the right side of the seat after
1 Seat cushion length
turning the SmartKey in the starter switch
2 Backrest bottom
Pull out head restraint with both hands.
to position 2.
3 Backrest center
i
4 Backrest side bolsters
The head restraint(s) should be stored
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
in a secure place.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
Installing rear seat head restraints
Insert the head restraint and push it
Seat cushion length
down to the stop.
Adjust the seat cushion to the length of
Ensure proper head restraint positioning
your upper leg using switch 1.
( page 36).
97
Controls in detail
Seats
Backrest contour Heated seats Switching on seat heating
Adjust the contour of the backrest to Press upper switch position 1.
the desired position using switches 2
Driver s and front passenger seats
A red indicator lamp on the switch
and 3.
comes on.
The switch is located in the center console.
Backrest side bolsters
Switching off seat heating
Adjust the backrest side bolsters so
Press upper switch position 1 again.
that they provide good lateral support
using switch 4.
i
The seat heater will be automatically
switched off after approximately
30 minutes.
Switching on rapid seat heating
1 Normal heating
Press lower switch position 2.
2 Rapid heating
Both red indicator lamps on the switch
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
come on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
i
The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately five
minutes. Only one indicator lamp re-
mains lit.
98
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching off rapid seat heating Rear seats Switching on seat heating
Press lower switch position 2 again. The switch is located on the B (center) pil- Press upper switch position 1.
lar.
A red indicator lamp on the switch
i
comes on.
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
heater switch are blinking, there is in-
Switching off seat heating
sufficient voltage available as too many
Press upper switch position 1 again.
electrical consumers are turned on.
The seat heater switches off automati-
i
cally.
The seat heater will be automatically
The seat heater will switch back on
switched off after approximately
again automatically as soon as suffi-
30 minutes.
cient voltage is available.
1 Normal heating
Switching on rapid seat heating
2 Rapid heating
Press lower switch position 2.
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
Both red indicator lamps on the switch
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
come on.
i
The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately five
minutes. Only one indicator lamp re-
mains lit.
99
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching off rapid seat heating
Press lower switch position 2 again.
i
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
heater switch are blinking, there is in-
sufficient voltage available as too many
electrical consumers are turned on.
The seat heater switches off automati-
cally.
The seat heater will switch back on
again automatically as soon as suffi-
cient voltage is available.
100
Controls in detail
Memory function
Memory function
The memory button and stored position
!
Warning! G
switch are located on the door.
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driv-
er should check and adjust the seat
You can store up to three different settings
Do not activate the memory function while
height, seat position fore and aft, and
per SmartKey.
driving. Activating the memory function
seat backrest angle if necessary, to en-
while driving could cause the driver to lose
The following settings are saved for each
sure adequate control, reach and com-
control of the vehicle.
stored position:
fort. The head restraint should also be
Driver s seat and seat backrest posi-
adjusted for proper height. See also the
tion
section on airbags ( page 57) for
proper seat positioning.
Steering wheel position
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
Driver s side exterior rear view mirror
ensure adequate control, reach, opera-
position
tion and comfort. Both the interior and
Passenger-side exterior rear view mir-
exterior rear view mirrors should be ad-
ror position
justed for adequate rear vision.
Front passenger seat position
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small
children should be seated in a properly
These key-dependent memory settings
secured restraint system that complies
can be deactivated if desired
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
( page 135).
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.
101
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory
Adjust the seats, steering wheel and Press and hold position button 2 until
exterior rear view mirrors to the de- the seat, steering wheel and rear view
sired position ( page 34). mirrors have fully moved to the stored
positions.
Press memory button 1.
Release memory button and push posi- i
tion button 2 within three seconds.
Releasing the button immediately
stops movement to the stored posi-
All the settings are stored at the select-
tions.
1 Memory button
ed position.
2 Stored position buttons
Make sure the ignition is switched on
Warning! G
or the relevant door is open and the
SmartKey is inserted in the starter
Do not operate the power seats using the
switch.
memory button if the seat backrest is in an
excessively reclined position. Doing so
could cause damage to front or rear seats.
First move seat backrest to an upright posi-
tion.
102
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing exterior rear view mirror park- Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
ing position with button 1 so that you see the rear
wheel and the curb.
For easier parking, you can adjust the pas-
Press memory button 4 on the door.
senger-side exterior rear view mirror so
Within three seconds, press bottom of
that you can see the right rear wheel as
adjustment button 1 above the exteri-
soon as you engage reverse gear R.
or lamp switch.
For information on activating the parking
The parking position is stored if the
position, see  Activating exterior rear view
mirror does not move.
mirror parking position ( page 153).
1 Adjustment button
2 Driver s side mirror
i
i
3 Passenger-side mirror
If the mirror does move, repeat the
You can store a parking position for the
4 Memory button
above steps. After the setting is stored
passenger-side exterior rear view mir-
you can move the mirror again.
ror for each SmartKey using the memo-
Stop the vehicle.
ry switch.
Switch ignition on (if not already on).
Press button 3.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
103
Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting
For notes on how to switch on the head- Exterior lamp switch M Off
lamps and use the turn signals, see the
U Automatic headlamp mode
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
 Getting started section ( page 46).
C Parking lamps (also side marker
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
i
lamps, tail lamps, license plate
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
If you drive in countries where vehicles
Canada only: When engine is run-
drive on the other side of the road than
ning, the low beam is additionally
the country where the vehicle is regis-
switched on.
tered, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
B Parking lamps plus low beam or
Relevant information can be obtained
high beam headlamps (combination
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
switch pushed forward).
Light Truck Center.
Ć Standing lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
 Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
104
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual headlamp mode
i
To minimize risk to you and to others, acti-
If you remove the SmartKey and open
The low beam headlamps and parking vate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
the driver s door while the parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the switch to B when driving or when traffic
lamps or low beam headlamps are
exterior lamp switch, see ( page 104). and/or ambient lighting conditions require
switched on:
you to do so.
Automatic headlamp mode
a warning sounds In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
The parking lamps, low beam headlamps
$ appears in the multifunction
vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U
and license plate lamps switch on and off
display
to B will briefly switch off the head-
automatically depending on the brightness
the message TURN OFF LIGHTS! ap-
lamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
of the ambient light.
pears in the multifunction display
lighting conditions may result in an acci-
Turn the exterior lamp switch to U.
dent.
i
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
Warning! G
With the daytime running lamp mode aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
activated and the engine running, the the operation of the vehicle s lights at all
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
low beam headlamps cannot be times.
the headlamps may switch off unexpect-
switched off manually.
edly when the system senses bright am-
bient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic.
the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions.
105
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode To activate the daytime running lamp
i
mode, see  Setting daytime running lamp
With the daytime running lamp mode
Turn exterior lamp switch to
mode ( page 129).
activated, the low beam headlamps will
position M or U.
not be switched off automatically.
i
When the engine is running, the low beam
headlamps are automatically switched on.
See notes on the exterior lamp switch
i
In low ambient light conditions the parking
( page 104).
Front fog lamps and rear fog lamp can lamps will also switch on.
not be switched on manually with exte-
Locator lighting and night security illu-
rior lamp switch in position U. To Canada only
mination
activate the fog lamps, turn exterior
When you shift from a driving position to
Locator lighting and night security illumi-
lamp switch to position B.
position N or P, the low beam switches off
nation are described in the control system
(three minutes delay).
section under  Setting locator lighting
( page 130) and  Setting night security il-
For nighttime driving, you should turn the
lumination ( page 131).
exterior lamp switch to position B to
permit activation of the high beam head-
Exterior rear view mirror lamps
lamps.
If the vehicle is centrally unlocked in the
USA only
darkness, the lamps in the exterior rear
view mirrors come on.
The high beam headlamps can also be ac-
tivated when driving with the daytime run-
ning lamp mode activated and exterior
lamp switch in position M.
106
Controls in detail
Lighting
If a door is opened, the lamp on this side Combination switch
i
goes out. If no doors are opened, the
Fog lamps will operate with the parking
The combination switch is located on the
lamps go out:
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps
left side of the steering column.
on. Fog lamps should only be used in
when the ignition is switched on
conjunction with low beam headlamps.
after a maximum of 40 seconds
Consult your State or Province Motor
Vehicle Regulations regarding allow-
Switching on front fog lamps
able lamp operation.
Warning! G
Switching on rear fog lamp
Check that the low beam headlamps
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
are switched on.
only switch from position U to B
with the vehicle at a standstill. Switching
Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
1 High beam
from U to B will briefly switch off
stop.
2 High beam flasher
the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
The yellow indicator lamp in the
ambient lighting conditions may result in an
lamp switch comes on.
accident.
Make sure the low beam headlamps
are switched on.
Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The green indicator lamp ! in the
lamp switch comes on.
107
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on high beams Hazard warning flasher Switching on the hazard warning
flasher
Turn exterior lamp switch to
The hazard warning flasher can be activat-
position B or to U Press the hazard warning flasher
ed with the ignition switched on or off. It is
( page 104). switch.
activated automatically when an airbag is
Push the combination switch in All the turn signals will blink.
deployed.
direction 1.
The switch is located on the center con-
i
The high beam headlamp
sole.
With the hazard warning flasher acti-
indicator A in the instrument clus-
vated and the combination switch set
ter comes on.
for either left or right turn, only the re-
spective left or right turn signals will
High beam flasher
operate when the SmartKey in the
Pull the combination switch briefly in
starter switch is in position 1 or 2.
direction 2.
Switching off the hazard warning
flasher
Press hazard warning flasher switch
again.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
108
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting Activating automatic control Deactivating automatic control
Move rocker switch 3 to center Press the = symbol on rocker
position. switch 3.
Interior lamps are switched on in dark- The interior lighting and the entry
ness, when you lamps remain switched off in darkness,
even when you
unlock the vehicle
unlock the vehicle
open a door
open a door
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
In addition, the entry lamps in the door
1 Cargo compartment lamps
trays will come on when you open a
2 Right reading lamp
Manual control
door.
3 Rocker switch for automatic control
system
The interior lamps are switched off fol-
Switching lamps on
4 Left reading lamp
lowing an adjustable time delay
Press the W symbol on rocker
( page 132).
i
switch 3.
If the door remains open, the interior
The interior lighting remains on even
lamps switch off automatically after ap-
when the doors are closed.
proximately five minutes.
109
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching lamps off Rear interior lamps Cargo compartment lamps
Move rocker switch 3 to center posi-
The rear interior lamps are located above
tion to activate the automatic control.
Switching on and off
the rear seat bench on the left and right
side.
!
To prevent the vehicle battery from be-
ing discharged, all interior lamps
switch off automatically after approxi-
mately 30 minutes with the tailgate
open.
If an interior lamp is switched on man-
ually, it does not go out automatically.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure
1 Switch for cargo compartment lamps
the interior lamps are switched off.
1 The lamps are switched on Press button � to switch the cargo
The rear interior lamps can be switched
continuously compartment lamps 2 on/off.
on with the SmartKey in starter switch
2 The lamps are switched off
position 0 or SmartKey removed from
3 Automatic function
the starter switch for up to 30 minutes.
110
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on
Press lock cylinder 2 to activate the
cargo compartment lamps again.
The cargo compartment lamps will
switch on.
Warning! G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
2 Cargo compartment lamps
1 Door lock
keep hands and fingers away from the tail-
2 Lock cylinder
gate opening when closing the tailgate. Be
Switching on and off with the tailgate
especially careful when small children are
open
Switching off
around.
If the tailgate should remain open for a
Open the tailgate. Only drive with the tailgate closed as other-
longer period of time, the cargo compart-
wise exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
Press door lock 1 down until it engag-
ment lamps may be switched off separate-
interior.
es (arrow).
ly.
!
Do not close the tailgate if the lock is
engaged in down position. The lock
could otherwise be damaged.
When locking the tailgate, it is impor-
tant that the door lock be in the same
position as shown in the illustration.
111
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument Instrument cluster illumination To dim illumination
cluster can be found in the  At a glance
Turn reset button 1 in the instrument
Use the reset button to adjust the illumina-
section of this manual ( page 24).
cluster counterclockwise.
tion brightness for the instrument cluster.
The instrument cluster illumination will
i
dim.
The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to Coolant temperature display
suit ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will
Warning! G
also be adjusted automatically when
you switch on the vehicle s exterior
Driving when your engine is badly over-
lamps.
heated can cause some fluids which
1 Reset button
may have leaked into the engine com-
To brighten illumination partment to catch fire. You could be se-
The instrument cluster is activated when
riously burned.
you:
Turn reset button 1 in the instrument
Steam from an overheated engine can
cluster clockwise.
open a door
cause serious burns and can occur just
The instrument cluster illumination will
turn on the ignition
by opening the hood. Stay away from
brighten.
the engine if you see or hear steam com-
press reset button 1
ing from it.
switch on the exterior lamps
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
You can change the instrument cluster set-
engine has cooled down.
tings in the Instrument cluster submenu of
the control system ( page 127).
112
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
During severe operating conditions, e.g. Tachometer
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tempera-
The red marking on the tachometer de-
ture may rise close to 248�F (120�C).
notes excessive engine speed.
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248�F
!
(120�C). Doing so may cause serious en-
Avoid driving at excessive engine
gine damage which is not covered by the
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
speeds, as it may result in serious en-
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
to position 1 or 2.
gine damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Call up the trip odometer and main
Trip odometer
odometer by pressing button Ł
or � on the multifunction steering To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
Make sure you are viewing the trip
wheel ( page 116). is interrupted if the engine is operated
odometer display ( page 115).
within the red marking.
Press button j or k until the
If it is not displayed, press button Ł
coolant temperature display appears.
or � on the multifunction steering
wheel ( page 116) until the trip odom-
i
eter appears.
Excessive coolant temperature triggers
Press and hold the reset button on the
a warning in the multifunction display
instrument cluster ( page 112) until
( page 269).
the trip odometer is reset.
113
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Outside temperature indicator The temperature sensor is located in the When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
front bumper area. Due to its location, the ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
sensor can be affected by road or engine garage), you will notice a delay before the
Warning! G
heat during idling or slow driving. This lower temperature is displayed.
means that the accuracy of the displayed
A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
temperature can only be verified by com-
atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
parison to a thermometer placed next to
perature indications caused by heat
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
the sensor, not by comparison to external
radiated from the engine during idling or
displays (e.g. bank signs, etc.).
Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
slow driving.
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
The outside temperature is displayed in
the multifunction display ( page 115).
For information on how to select the unit of
the displayed temperature, i.e. degrees
Celsius (�C) or degrees Fahrenheit (�F),
see  Selecting temperature display mode
( page 127).
114
Controls in detail
Control system
Control system
The control system is activated as soon as Multifunction display
Warning! G
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1. The control system
A driver s attention to the road and traffic
enables you to
conditions must always be his/her primary
call up information about your vehicle
focus when driving.
change vehicle settings
For your safety and the safety of others, se-
lecting features through the multifunction
For example, you can use the control sys-
1 Trip odometer
steering wheel should only be done by the
tem to find out when your vehicle is next
driver when traffic and road conditions per- 2 Main odometer
due for service, to set the language for
3 Outside temperature
mit it to be done safely.
messages in the instrument cluster display
4 Clock1
and much more.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
5 Current gear selector lever position
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
6 Transfer case program mode
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
ly 13.5 m) every second.
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
1
See separate operating instructions for the
COMAND system for clock setting.
115
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel Pressing any of the buttons on the multi-
1 Multifunction display in the speed-
function steering wheel will alter what is
ometer
The displays in the multifunction display
shown in the multifunction display.
Operating the control system
and the settings in the control system are
The information available in the multifunc-
controlled by the buttons on the multifunc-
2 Selecting the submenu or setting
tion display is arranged in menus, each
tion steering wheel.
the volume
containing a number of functions or sub-
� down/to decrease
menus.
ć up/to increase
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD op-
3 Telephone*
erations under AUDIO, for example). These
� to take a call
functions serve to call up relevant informa-
� to end a call
tion or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
4 Menu systems
Ł for next menu
� for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu
j for next display
k for previous display
116
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the In the SETTINGS menu, instead of functions The menus are described on the following
functions within each menu, as being ar- you will find a number of submenus for pages.
ranged in a circular pattern. calling up and changing settings. For in-
structions on using these submenus, see
If you press button Ł or �
the  Settings menu section ( page 123).
repeatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other. The number of menus available in the sys-
tem depends on which optional equipment
If you press button k or j
is installed in your vehicle.
repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
117
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus. overview of the individual menus.
118
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 Menu 7
Standard AUDIO NAVI Malfunction Settings Trip computer Telephone
display memory
Coolant Select radio Activate route Call up Reset to factory Fuel Load phone book
temperature station guidance malfunction settings consumption
display messages statistics after
start
Digital Operate CD Instrument Fuel Search for name
speedometer player cluster submenu consumption in phone book
statistics since
the last reset
Call up FSS Lighting Call up range
submenu
Check engine oil Vehicle submenu
level
Convenience
submenu
119
Commands/submenu
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu AUDIO menu
i
The headings used in the menus table
You can select the functions in the stan- The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
are designed to facilitate navigation
dard display menu with button k the audio equipment which you currently
within the system and are not neces-
or j. have turned on.
sarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays. The following functions are available: If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message AUDIO OFF is shown in the
The first function displayed in each
Function Page
display.
menu will automatically show you
Call up coolant temperature 112
which part of the system you are in. The following functions are available:
display
Function Page
Call up digital speedometer 120
Select radio station 121
Call up FSS 242
Operate CD player 121
Check engine oil level 229
Display digital speedometer
Press button j twice.
The current vehicle speed is shown in
the multifunction display.
120
Controls in detail
Control system
Select radio station Press button k or j repeatedly Operate the CD player
until the desired station is found.
Turn on the radio. Refer to separate op- Turn on the radio and select the CD
erating instructions. The type of search depends on the set- player. Refer to separate operating in-
ting for the station tuning: structions.
Press button Ł or � repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned sta- The next stored station is selected Press button Ł or � repeatedly
tion in the display. (SP) until the settings for the CD currently
being played are shown in the display.
Station search
i
You can only store new stations by us-
ing the corresponding feature on the
radio. Refer to separate operating in-
structions.
1 Station
2 Waveband setting 1 Current track
You can also operate the radio in the
3 Setting for station selection using 2 Current CD (for CD changer)
usual manner.
memory
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
i
To select a CD from the magazine,
press a number on the COMAND sys-
tem key pad located in the center dash-
board.
121
Controls in detail
Control system
NAVI menu Malfunction memory menu Press button Ł or � repeatedly
until you see the malfunction message
The NAVI menu contains the functions Use the malfunction memory menu to scan
memory in the display.
needed to operate your navigation system. malfunction and warning messages that
may be stored in the system. The informa-
No malfunction messages
Press button Ł or � repeatedly
tion shown in the display depends on
until you see the message NAVI in the
If no malfunctions have occurred, the mes-
whether malfunctions have actually oc-
display.
sage in the display is:
curred.
NO MALFUNCTION
If the navigation system is off, the mes-
sage NAVI OFF is shown in the display.
Warning! G
Malfunctions have occurred
If the navigation system is on, the mes-
If malfunctions have occurred, you will see
sage NAVI ACTIVE is shown in the dis-
Malfunction and warning messages are only
the number of malfunctions in the display:
play.
indicated for certain systems and are inten-
tionally not very detailed. The malfunction
Please refer to the COMAND manual for in-
and warning messages are simply a remind-
structions on how to activate the route
er with respect to the operation of certain
guidance system*.
systems and do not replace the owner s
and/or driver s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
1 Number of malfunctions
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
Press button k or j.
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center to address the malfunc- The stored messages will now be dis-
tion and warning messages ( page 260). played in order. See the  Practical
hints section for malfunction and
warning messages ( page 260).
122
Controls in detail
Control system
Should any malfunctions occur while driv- Settings menu Resetting all settings
ing, the number of malfunctions will reap-
You can reset all the functions of all sub-
In the SETTINGS... menu there are two
pear in the display when the SmartKey in
menus to the factory settings.
functions:
the starter switch is turned to position 0 or
Press the reset button in the instru-
removed from the starter switch.
The function RESET: R BUTTON FOR
ment cluster ( page 112) for approxi-
3 SEC., with which you can reset all the
i
mately three seconds.
settings to those set at the factory.
The message memory will be cleared
In the display you will see the request
A collection of submenus with which
when you turn the SmartKey in the
to press the reset button again to con-
you can make individual settings for
starter switch to position 1 or 2. You
firm.
your vehicle.
will then only see Priority 1 malfunc-
Press the reset button again.
tions ( page 260).
Press button Ł or � repeatedly
The functions of all the submenus will
until the SETTINGS... menu is seen in
reset to factory settings.
the display.
123
Controls in detail
Control system
Submenus in the Settings menu The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
i
Scroll down with the � button, scroll up
The settings you have changed will not
Press button k or j.
with the ć button.
be reset unless you confirm the action
In the display you see the collection of
by pressing the reset button a second
Move within the submenus with the k
the submenus.
time. Approximately five seconds after
or j button to the individual functions.
pressing the reset button for the sec-
The settings themselves are made with
ond time, the SETTINGS... menu reap-
button ć or �.
pears in the display.
For safety reasons, the following func-
tions are not reset while driving:
the LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLIGHT MODE
Press button �.
function in the LIGHTING submenu
The selection marker moves to the next
the SETTINGS KEY- DEPENDENT func-
submenu.
tion in the CONVENIENCE submenu
124
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting the functions of a submenu
i
The settings you have changed will not
For each submenu you can reset all the
be reset unless you confirm the action
functions to the factory settings.
by pressing the reset button a second
Move to a function in the submenu.
time. Approximately five seconds after
Press the reset button in the instru-
pressing the reset button for the sec-
ment cluster ( page 112) for approxi- ond time, the SETTINGS... menu reap-
mately three seconds.
pears in the display.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button again to con-
firm.
Press the reset button again.
All functions of the submenu will reset
to factory settings
125
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus. De-
tailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pag-
es.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LIGHTING VEHICLE CONVENIENCE
Select time display mode Set daytime running lamp mode Set station selection mode Activate easy-entry/exit feature
(USA only) (radio)
Select temperature display Set locator lighting Set automatic locking Set key-dependency
mode
Select speedometer display Exterior lamps delayed Set parking position for exterior
mode switch-off rear view mirror
Select language Interior lighting delayed
switch-off
Select display (speed display or
outside temperature)
126
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu Selecting time display mode Selecting temperature display mode
Access the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER menu via Move the selection marker with Move the selection marker with
the SETTINGS menu. Use the INSTRUMENT the ć or � button to the the ć or � button to the
CLUSTER submenu to change the instru- INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu.
ment cluster display settings. The follow-
Press button j or k repeatedly Press button j or k repeatedly
ing functions are available:
until you see this message in the until you see this message in the dis-
display: 12/24 HOUR. play: TEMP. INDICATOR.
Function Page
The selection marker is on the current The selection marker is on the current
Select time display mode 127
setting. setting.
Select temperature display 127
mode
Select speedometer display 128
mode
Select language 128
Select display (speed display or 129
outside temperature)
Press ć or � to set the 12h or Press ć or � to set temperature
24h time display mode. unit to degrees Celsius (�C) or degrees
Fahrenheit (�F).
127
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting speedometer display mode Selecting language Press ć or � to select the lan-
guage to be used for the multifunction
Move the selection marker with Move the selection marker with
display messages.
the ć or � button to the the ć or � button to the
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu. Available languages:
Press button j or k repeatedly Press button j or k repeatedly German
until you see this message in the dis- until you see this message in the dis-
English
play: DISPLAY VALUES IN. play: TEXT.
French
The selection marker is on the current The selection marker is on the current
Italian
setting. setting.
Spanish
Press ć or � to set speedome-
ter unit to KM or Miles.
128
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting display (speed display or out- Lighting submenu Press button j or k repeatedly
side temperature) until you see this message in the dis-
Access the LIGHTING submenu via the SET-
play: LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLIGHT MODE.
Move the selection marker with TINGS menu. Use the LIGHTING submenu
the ć or � button to the to change the lamp and lighting settings on The selection marker is on the current
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu. your vehicle. The following functions are setting.
available:
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
Function Page
play: SELECT DISPLAY.
Set daytime running lamp mode 129
The selection marker is on the current
(USA only)
setting.
Set locator lighting 130
Press ć or � to select manual
Exterior lamps delayed 131
or daytime running lamp (constant)
switch-off
mode. This function is not available in
Interior lighting delayed 132
countries where daytime running
switch-off
lamps are mandatory.
With daytime running lamp mode se-
Setting daytime running lamp mode
Press ć or � to select the dis-
lected and the exterior lamp switch at
(USA only)
play permanently shown in the multi-
position 0, the following lamps will
function display.
Move the selection marker with
come on automatically when the en-
the ć or � button to the LIGHT-
gine is turned on:
ING submenu.
Parking lamps and low beam head-
lamps
License plate lamps
129
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting locator lighting Press button j or k repeatedly
i
until you see this message in the dis-
If you turn the exterior lamp switch to
During darkness, the following lamps will
play: LOCATOR LIGHTING.
another position, the corresponding
come on when the exterior lamp switch is
lamp(s) will switch on.
in position U, the locator lighting fea- The selection marker is on the current
ture is activated, and the vehicle is un- setting.
For safety reasons, resetting the
locked by SmartKey:
LIGHTING submenu to factory settings
( page 123) will not reset the daytime
parking lamps
running lamp mode.
tail lamps
In the display you will then see the mes-
license plate lamps
sage: LIGHTING  CANNOT BE TOTALLY
front fog lamps
RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS WHILE
Press ć or � to select the de-
DRIVING.
The locator lighting switches off when the
sired setting.
driver s door is opened. It switches off au-
The locator lighting will be switched on
tomatically after a period of approximately
or off.
40 seconds.
Move the selection marker with
the ć or � button to the
LIGHTING submenu.
130
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting night security illumination Press ć or � to select the de-
i
sired lamp-on period.
You can reactivate this function within
(Exterior lamps delayed switch-off)
ten minutes by opening a door.
You can select:
Use the HEADLIGHTS DELAYED SHUT-OFF
If you do not open a door after remov- 0 s, the delayed switch-off feature
function to set whether and for how long
you would like the exterior lamps to illumi- ing the SmartKey, the lamps will auto-
is deactivated
matically switch off after 60 seconds.
nate during darkness after all doors are
15 s, 30 s, 45 s or 60 s, the delayed
closed. When the delayed shut-off feature
switch-off feature is activated
is activated and the exterior lamp switch is
Move the selection marker with
You can temporarily deactivate the de-
in position U, the following lamps will
the ć or � button to the LIGHT-
layed switch-off feature:
remain lit after you remove the SmartKey
ING submenu.
from the starter switch:
Before leaving the vehicle, turn the
Press button j or k repeatedly
SmartKey in the starter switch to
parking lamps
until you see this message in the dis-
position 0.
play: HEADLIGHTS DELAYED SHUT-OFF.
tail lamps
Then turn it to position 2 and back
The selection marker is on the current
license plate lamps
to 0.
setting.
front fog lamps
The delayed switch-off feature is deac-
tivated. It will reactivate as soon as you
reinsert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
131
Controls in detail
Control system
Interior lighting delayed switch-off Vehicle submenu
Use this function to set whether and for Access the VEHICLE submenu via the
how long you would like the interior light- SETINGS menu. Use the VEHICLE submenu
ing to remain lit during darkness after the to make general vehicle settings. The fol-
SmartKey is removed from the starter lowing functions are available:
switch.
Function Page
Press ć or � to select the de-
Move the selection marker with
Set station selection mode 132
sired lamp-on time period. You can se-
the ć or � button to the LIGHT-
(radio)
lect:
ING submenu.
Set automatic locking 133
0 s, the delayed switch-off feature
Press button j or k repeatedly
is deactivated
until you see this message in the dis-
Setting station selection mode
play: INT. LIGHTING DELAYED
5 s, 10 s, 15 s or 20 s, the delayed
SHUT-OFF. Use the PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE
switch-off feature is activated
function to select the manual or memory
The selection marker is on the current
station selection mode for the radio.
setting.
Move the selection marker with
the ć or � button to the
VEHICLE submenu.
132
Controls in detail
Control system
Press button j or k repeatedly Setting automatic locking Convenience submenu
until you see this message in the dis-
Use this function to activate or deactivate Access the CONVENIENCE submenu via the
play: PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE.
the automatic central locking. With the au- SETTINGS menu. Use the CONVENIENCE sub-
The selection marker is on the current tomatic central locking system activated, menu to change the settings for a number
setting. the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle of convenience features. The following
speeds of approximately 9 mph functions are available:
(15 km/h).
Function Page
Move the selection marker with
Activate easy-entry/exit feature 133
the ć or � button to the
Set key-dependency 135
Vehicle submenu.
Set parking position for exterior 135
Press button j or k repeatedly
Press ć or � to select the de-
rear view mirror
until you see this message in the dis-
sired station selection mode. You can
play: AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK.
select:
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
The selection marker is on the current
STATION SEARCH
Use this function to activate and deacti-
setting.
vate the easy-entry/exit feature. When the
MEMORY selects next stored station
feature is activated, the steering wheel will
move back to facilitate exiting when you
remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch
open the driver s door
Press ć or � to switch function
However, the engine must be turned off.
ON or OFF.
133
Controls in detail
Control system
After entering the vehicle, the steering Press button j or k repeatedly
Warning! G
wheel will move into the position stored in until you see this message in the dis-
memory when play: EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE.
Make sure no one can become trapped or in-
the driver s door is closed The selection marker is on the current
jured by the moving steering wheel when
setting.
the easy-entry/exit feature is in operation
you put the SmartKey in the starter
and the driver s door is being opened or the
switch and
SmartKey is removed from the starter
press the appropriate stored position
switch.
button on the memory switch
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
( page 103)
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
i
Children could open the driver s door and
Press ć or � to change the
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
To cancel steering wheel movement,
easy-entry/exit setting.
feature, which could result in an accident
do one of the following:
and/or serious personal injury.
The following settings are available for the
Move the steering column stalk
easy-entry/exit feature
( page 22)
Press the memory switch
OFF The easy-entry/exit
( page 102)
feature is deactivat-
ed
Move the selection marker with
STEERING COLUMN The easy-entry/exit
the ć or � button to the CONVE-
feature is activated
NIENCE submenu.
134
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting key-dependency Move the selection marker with
i
the ć or � button to the CONVE-
Use this function to set whether the mem- For safety reasons, resetting the SET-
NIENCE submenu.
TINGS KEY-DEPENDENT submenu to fac-
ory settings for the seats, the steering
tory settings will not reset while
wheel and the exterior mirrors should be Press button j or k repeatedly
driving.
stored separately for each SmartKey until you see this message in the dis-
( page 101). play: MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING.
In the display you will then see the mes-
sage: CONVENIENCE  CANNOT BE TO- The selection marker is on the current
Move the selection marker with
the ć or � button to the CONVE- TALLY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS
setting.
WHILE DRIVING.
NIENCE submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
Setting parking position for exterior rear
until you see this message in the dis-
view mirror
play: SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT.
Use the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING
The selection marker is on the current
function to select whether the passen-
setting.
ger-side exterior rear view mirror should be Press ć or � to switch function
turned downward during parking maneu- ON or OFF.
vers when reverse gear is engaged. For
more information, see  Activating exterior
rear view mirror parking position
( page 153).
Press ć or � to set key depen-
dency to ON or OFF.
135
Controls in detail
Control system
Trip computer menu Fuel consumption statistics after start Fuel consumption since last reset
Press button � or Ł repeatedly Press button � or Ł repeatedly
Use the trip computer menu to call up sta-
until you see the first function of the until you see the first function of the
tistical data on your vehicle. The following
Trip computer menu. Trip computer menu.
information is available:
Press button j or k repeatedly Press button j or k repeatedly
Function Page
until you see this message in the multi- until you see this message in the dis-
Fuel consumption statistics after 136 function display: AFTER START. play: AFTER RESET.
start
Fuel consumption statistics 136
since last reset
Call up range (distance to empty) 137
1 Time elapsed since start 1 Time elapsed since last reset
2 Average fuel consumption since start 2 Average fuel consumption since last re-
3 Average speed since start set
4 Distance driven since start 3 Average speed since last reset
4 Distance driven since last reset
136
Controls in detail
Control system
Call up range (distance to empty) TEL menu
i
All statistics stored since the last en- Press button � or Ł repeatedly
gine start will be reset approximately
until you see the first function of the
Warning! G
four hours after the SmartKey in the
Trip computer menu.
starter switch is turned to position 0 or
Press button j or k repeatedly A driver s attention to the road and traffic
removed from the starter switch.
until you see this message in the dis- conditions must always be his/her primary
Resetting will not occur if you turn the
play: RANGE. focus when driving. For your safety and the
SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 with-
safety of others, we recommend that you
In the display you will see the calculat-
in this time period.
pull over to a safe location and stop before
ed range based on the current fuel tank
placing or taking a telephone call. If you
level.
choose to use the telephone while driving,
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
please use the hands-free device and only
Press button � or Ł repeatedly
use the telephone when weather, road and
until you see the first function of the
traffic conditions permit.
Trip computer menu.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
Press button j or k repeatedly
using a cellular telephone while driving a ve-
until you see the reading that you want
hicle.
to reset in the display.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
Press and hold the reset button in the
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
instrument cluster ( page 112) until
covering a distance of approximately
the value is reset to 0.
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every sec-
ond.
137
Controls in detail
Control system
If the telephone is on: Answering a call
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- The telephone will then search for a When your telephone is ready to receive
out being connected to an external antenna) network. During this time the display is calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
from inside the vehicle while the engine is empty. the display you will then see the message:
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
As soon as the telephone has found a
tion of the vehicle s electronic system, pos-
network, READY is indicated in the dis-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
play.
personal injury.
You can use the functions in the TEL menu
to operate your telephone, provided it is
Press button �.
connected to a hands-free system and
You have answered the call. In the dis-
switched on.
play you see the length of the call.
Switch on the telephone and COMAND.
1 Signal strength
Ending a call
Press button � or Ł on the
This standby message indicates that your
steering wheel repeatedly until you see
telephone is ready for use and you can op- Press button �.
the TEL menu in the display.
erate it using the control system.
You have ended the call. In the display
Which messages will appear in the display
you will again see the standby mes-
field depends on whether your telephone is
sage.
switched on or off:
If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is: TEL OFF.
138
Controls in detail
Control system
Dialing a number from the phone book Redialing
i
If you press and hold j or k for
If your telephone is ready to receive calls, The control system stores the most recent-
longer than one second, the system
you may select and dial a number from the ly dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
scrolls rapidly through the list of names
phone book at any time. the need to search through your entire
until you release the button again.
phone book.
Press button � or Ł repeatedly
until you see the TEL menu in the dis- Cancel the quick search mode by
Press button � or Ł repeatedly
pressing �.
play. until you see the TEL menu in the dis-
play.
Press button j or k.
Press button �.
Press button �.
The control system reads the phone
The system dials the selected phone
book which is stored in the telephone. In the display, you see the first number
number.
This may take up to 30 seconds. In the in the redial memory.
display you will see the message
If connection is successful, the
Press button j or k repeatedly
PLEASE WAIT!.
name of the party you called and
until the desired name appears in the
the duration of the call will appear
When the message PLEASE WAIT! dis- display.
in the display.
appears, the phone book has been
Press button �.
loaded.
The control system dials the selected
Press button j or k repeatedly
phone number.
until the desired name appears in the
display.
The stored names are displayed in as-
cending or descending alphabetical or-
If no connection is made, the con-
der.
trol system stores the dialed num-
ber in the redial memory.
139
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission
For more information on driving with an au- The automatic transmission selects indi-
Warning! G
tomatic transmission, see the  Getting vidual gears automatically, dependent
started section ( page 43). upon
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
Your vehicle s transmission adapts its gear the gear selector lever position D with
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
shifting process to your individual driving gear ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 ( page 142)
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
style by continually adjusting the shift
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
transfer case position (HIGH or LOW)
points up or down. These shift point adjust-
accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
the position of the accelerator pedal
ments are performed based on current op-
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
( page 144)
erating and driving conditions.
someone or something. Only shift into gear
the vehicle speed
when the engine is idling normally and when
If the operating conditions change, the au-
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
tomatic transmission reacts by adjusting
The current gear selector lever position
its gear shift program.
and the transfer case position (HIGH or
LOW) appear in the multifunction display. When the gear selector lever is in
i
position D, you can influence transmission
During the brief warm-up, transmission
shifting by
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
limiting the gear range
catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperature.
changing gears manually
1 Transfer case display
2 Gear selector lever position/gear
range
140
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
One-touch gearshifting Canceling gear range limit
i
To avoid overrevving the engine when
Press and hold the gear selector lever
Even with an automatic transmission, you
the gear selector lever is moved to the
in the D+ direction until Dreappears in
can change the gears manually when the
D- direction, the transmission will not
the multifunction display.
gear selector lever is in position D.
shift to a lower gear if the engine s
The transmission will shift from the current
max. speed would be exceeded.
gear range directly to gear range D.
Downshifting
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
Upshifting
Shifting into optimal gear range
the left in the D direction.
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
Press and hold the gear selector lever
The transmission will shift from the current
the right in the D+ direction.
in the D- direction.
gear to the next lower gear. This action si-
The transmission will shift from the current
The transmission will automatically select
multaneously limits the gear range of the
gear to the next higher gear as permitted
the gear range suited for optimal accelera-
transmission ( page 142).
by the shift program. This action simulta-
tion and deceleration. This will involve
neously extends the gear range of the
shifting down one or more gears.
Warning! G
transmission.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of loss of control.
141
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear ranges Gear selector lever position
Effect
� The transmission shifts
With the gear selector lever in position D,
Effect
through fourth gear only.
you can limit the transmission s gear range
� Park position
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
Ł The transmission shifts
left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit
through third gear only.
Gear selector lever position
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
when the vehicle is parked. Place
With this selection you can
right (D+).
gear selector lever in position P
use the braking effect of the
only when vehicle is stopped.
The selected gear range will appear in the
engine.
The park position is not intended
multifunction display. If you press on the
� The transmission shifts
to serve as a brake when the
accelerator when the engine has reached
through second gear only.
vehicle is parked. Rather, the
its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift
Allows the use of engine s driver should always set the
beyond any gear range limit selected.
braking power when driving parking brake in addition to
!
placing the gear selector lever in
on steep downgrades
position P to secure the vehicle.
If the transfer case is in off-road driving
in mountainous regions
position LOW, the automatic transmis-
sion will not shift up automatically,
under extreme operating
even when the engine has reached the
conditions
speed limit for that gear. There is a risk
ć The transmission operates in
of damaging the engine.
first gear only.
It is very important to make sure the
For maximum use of engine s
permissible engine speed is not ex-
braking effect on very steep
ceeded.
or lengthy downgrades.
142
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
!
Effect Effect
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
The SmartKey can only be � Neutral
other reason with gear selector lever
removed from the starter switch
No power is transmitted from the
in N can result in transmission damage
with the gear selector lever in
engine to the drive axle. When
that is not covered by the
position P. With the SmartKey
the brakes are released, the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
removed, the gear selector lever
vehicle can be moved freely
is locked in position P.
(pushed or towed).
If the vehicle s electrical system
Warning! G
Do not engage N while driving
is malfunctioning, the gear
except:
selector lever could remain
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se-
to coast when vehicle is in
locked in position P
lector lever not fully engaged in position P is
danger of skidding (e.g. on
( page 290).
dangerous. Also, position P alone is not in-
icy roads) when the ESP is
tended to or capable of preventing your ve-
� Reverse gear
deactivated or malfunction-
hicle from moving, possibly hitting people or
Place gear selector lever in
ing
objects.
position R only when vehicle is
when you have to shift the
Always set the parking brake in addition to
stopped.
transfer case
shifting to position P ( page 51).
ę Drive
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
The transmission shifts
automatically. All five forward
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
gears are available.
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
143
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Accelerator position Emergency operation (Limp Home
Warning! G
Mode)
Your driving style influences the transmis-
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
sion s shifting behavior: If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
transmission no longer shifts, the trans-
Less throttle Earlier upshifting
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattend-
mission is most likely operating in limp
ed in the vehicle, or with access to an un- More throttle Later upshifting
home (emergency operation) mode. In this
locked vehicle. Children could move the
mode, only 2nd gear and reverse gear can
Kickdown
gear selector lever from position P, which
be activated.
could result in an accident and/or serious
Use kickdown when you want maximum
Stop the vehicle.
personal injury.
acceleration.
Move gear selector lever to P.
Press the accelerator past the point of
Turn off the engine.
resistance.
Wait at least ten seconds before re-
The transmission shifts into a lower
starting.
gear.
Restart the engine.
Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed. Move gear selector lever to position D
(for second gear) or R.
The transmission shifts up again.
Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
144
Controls in detail
Transfer case
Transfer case
For more information on off-road driving,
N Neutral
see  Off-road driving ( page 213).
No power is transmitted from
the engine to the drive axle.
Gear range
Switching transfer case
H HIGH
1 Transfer case indicator
Road position The switch is located in the center console.
2 Gear range indicator
L LOW
Transfer case indicator 1 in the multi-
Off-road position
function display shows the gear position of
the transfer case.
This position is intended for
driving off-road and step gradi-
ents.
The transmission will not up-
shift automatically to the next
higher gear range when driving
at the rpm limit.
The transfer case supports the
engine s driving force (approx.
1
/2 speed). Output is there-
fore increased.
145
Controls in detail
Transfer case
Switching from HIGH to LOW Switching from LOW to HIGH Messages in the multifunction display
If a shift was not completed and the multi-
! !
function display shows one of the following
The shift procedure can only be per- The shift procedure can only be per-
messages:
formed when: formed when:
TC SHIFT CONDITIONS NOT FULFILLED
The engine is running. The engine is running.
The shift did not take place. At least
The gear selector lever for the auto- The gear selector lever for the auto-
one shift condition was not met.
matic transmission is in position N. matic transmission is in position N.
Repeat the shift procedure.
The vehicle is not at standstill. The vehicle is not at standstill.
TC IN NEUTRAL
The vehicle speed does not exceed The vehicle speed does not exceed
The shift did not take place. The trans-
25 mph (40 km/h). 40 mph (70 km/h).
fer case is in neutral. The gear
positionN is displayed in the transfer
Press upper half ( LOW ) of the trans- Press lower half ( HIGH ) of the trans-
case indicator 1.
fer case switch. fer case switch.
Repeat the shift procedure.
Once the shift is complete, gear Once the shift is complete, gear
positionL is displayed in the transfer positionH is displayed in the transfer
case indicator. case indicator.
Warning! G
i i
If TC is in neutral, transmission position P
If the shift procedure does not take If the shift procedure does not take
will not hold vehicle. The parking brake must
place press upper half ( LOW ) of the place press lower half ( HIGH ) of the
be applied to hold vehicle in place.
transfer case switch again. transfer case switch again.
Put gear selector in D. Put gear selector in D.
146
Controls in detail
Transfer case
TC SHIFT  CANCELLED
i
If the SmartKey is in starter switch
The shift did not take place.
position 0 or 1, an alarm will sound if
Repeat the shift procedure.
the transfer case is in position N and
TRANSFER CASE  VISIT WORKSHOP!
the driver s door is opened.
There may be a malfunction in the sys- Engage transfer case to gear position
tem.
HIGH or LOW.
Repeat the shift procedure.
For more information, see  Practical hints
If the shift procedure still does not take
section ( page 281).
place, have the vehicle checked at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
147
Controls in detail
Differential locks
Differential locks
For more information on off-road driving,
!
Warning! G
see  Off-road driving ( page 213).
When driving off-road, apply only mod-
erate pressure to the accelerator pedal
Differential locks improve the vehicle s
Never drive on pavement with differential
if the differential locks are switched on.
tractive power off-road. Switch on differen-
locks engaged.
tial locks:
When running on a (single-axle) dyna-
Steering control will be strongly affected
mometer  no matter how briefly  you
for off-road driving
with the differential locks activated.
must:
to turn the ABS off during off-road driv-
The ABS, BAS and ESP are switched off au-
raise the non-driven axle
ing
tomatically when the transfer case differen-
tial lock is activated.
or
for driving through water
disconnect its drive shaft
when driving on deep snow and icy or
fouled surfaces
and
! engage the transfer differential lock
Do not engage the front axle differen-
Otherwise the transfer case can be
tial lock when driving around tight cor-
damaged, which is not covered by the
ners. This restricts steering ability.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
148
Controls in detail
Differential locks
A few words about differentials and The Electronic Traction System (ETS) ad- rear wheels. When the rear differential is
differential locks dresses this problem and provides for locked, power going to the rear wheels is
good control and steering ability by auto- equally distributed, so that both rear
When a vehicle negotiates a turn, wheels
matically slowing the slipping wheel and wheels turn at the same speed and torque.
on the outside of the curve must travel far-
thus increasing the power to the other When the front differential is locked, all
ther and rotate faster than the inside
non-slipping drive wheels to get the vehicle four wheels now turn with equal power and
wheels. The differential, the operation of a
moving. The ESP and ETS in this vehicle torque. Please be aware that engaging the
set of gears that allows the powered
feature such intelligent limited-slip differ- differential locks will significantly reduce
wheels in a vehicle to turn at different
ential technology, ideally suited for the steering ability of the vehicle.
speeds, makes this essential function pos-
on-road and light off-road driving. Transfer
For your safety and the safety of others
sible.
case position LOW ( page 145) also en-
and to prevent damage to the vehicle, the
hances off-road driving capabilities
The drawback is that the differential also
differential locks must not be engaged
( page 213).
sends most of the engine s power to the
when driving on paved roads. It is impor-
wheel with the least load or strain on it. For
More extreme off-road conditions may call tant to understand that during
example, if one of a vehicle s powered
for another solution, engaging a differen- on-road/paved driving, differentials are
wheels sits on a patch of snow and spins
tial lock or preventing the differential from absolutely necessary for providing the es-
because there is no traction, all of the en-
operating altogether. As part of its stan- sential control and steering ability of the
gine s power will go to that wheel because
dard equipment, this vehicle comes with vehicle. The differential locks, therefore,
the power will take the path of least resis-
three differential locks: front, transfer case must not be engaged when driving on
tance. Meanwhile, the opposite wheel, sit-
(center) and rear. Each can be engaged paved roads and should only be used to
ting on dry pavement where it could get
simply by pushing dashboard-mounted the extent necessary to negotiate off-road
enough grip to start the vehicle moving,
buttons in sequential order (center, rear, conditions which cannot be handled by the
sits idle because it receives no power.
front) ( page 150). When the transfer systems (automatic 4-ETS, the ESP, manu-
case (center) differential is locked, half of al switch position  LOW of transfer case)
the engine s power is automatically distrib- this vehicle comes equipped with.
uted to the front wheels and half to the
149
Controls in detail
Differential locks
Switching differential locks on and off Switching differential locks on The message ABS NOT AVAILABLE 
DIFFERENTIAL LOCKED appears in the
!
The switch is located in the center console.
multifunction display.
To avoid damage to the transfer case
The ESP warning lamp v and the
and differential locks:
ABS - warning lamp in the instru-
Engage differential locks only at low
ment cluster come on.
speed (walking speed, not more
Once the transfer case differential lock
than 5 mph).
is switched on, you can now, if needed,
Do not engage differential locks if
switch on rear axle differential
the driving wheels are spinning due
lock 2
to lack of traction.
or
Do not engage on paved roads.
1 Transfer case (center) differential lock
switch on rear axle differential lock
2 Rear axle differential lock
and front differential lock 2
Transfer case differential lock
3 Front differential lock
and 3.
Press switch 1.
4 Engagement indicator lamps (yellow)
5 Function indicator lamps (red)
The yellow engagement indicator
lamp 4 for the transfer case differen-
i
tial lock comes on.
The differential locks can only be
The ESP warning lamp v comes on.
switched on in the sequence 1,
2, 3. When the differential lock engagement
operation has been completed, the red
function indicator lamp 5 comes on.
150
Controls in detail
Differential locks
Rear axle differential lock Switching differential locks off To activate the ESP, BAS and ABS systems,
drive again for three seconds using a con-
Press switch 2. There are two different methods to disen-
stant driving style.
gage differential locks:
The yellow engagement indicator
All messages in the multifunction display
lamp 4 comes on first, followed by the You can switch the differential locks off
disappear. The ESP warning lamp v
red function indicator lamp 5. in reverse order (3, 2, 1).
and the ABS - warning lamp in the in-
The rear axle differential lock is To switch off all differential locks at the
strument cluster go out.
switched on. same time:
i
Press switch 1.
Front differential lock
If the function lamps do not go out
The yellow engagement indicator
when the differential locks are disen-
Press switch 3.
lamps 4 go out first. The red func-
gaged, bring vehicle to a stop and then
The yellow engagement indicator tion indicator lamps 5 go out
continue driving. Changing the vehicle
lamp 4 comes on first, followed by the when the switching process has
load can help to disengage locks.
red function indicator lamp 5. been carried out in the differential.
The front differential lock is switched
Warning! G
on.
Always remember to disengage the differen-
tial locks when returning to drive on paved
roads, see  A few words about differentials
and differential locks ( page 149).
151
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Good visibility
For information on windshield wipers, see
Warning! G Warning! G
 Windshield wipers ( page 47) and for
setting the exterior rear view mirrors, see
The automatic antiglare function does not In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
 Exterior rear view mirror ( page 38).
react if incoming light is not aimed directly may escape from the mirror housing if the
at sensors in the interior rear view mirror. mirror glass breaks.
Rear view mirror
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
rear view mirrors do not react, for example, low the liquid to come into contact with
Automatic antiglare rear view mirrors
if the cargo compartment is fully loaded. eyes, skin, clothing, or the respiratory sys-
The reflection brightness of the exterior
tem. In case it does, immediately flush af-
Glare can endanger you and others.
rear view mirrors and the interior rear view
fected area with water, and seek medical
mirror will respond automatically to glare
help if necessary.
when
Warning! G
the ignition is switched on, and
Exercise care when using the passen-
incoming light from headlamps falls on
ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
the sensor in the interior rear view mir-
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
ror
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
The interior rear view mirror will not react if
are closer than they appear. Check your in-
reverse gear is engaged side rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
the interior lighting is turned on
152
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating exterior rear view mirror Headlamp cleaning system
parking position
The switch is located to the left of the
Follow these steps to activate the mirror
steering column.
parking position so that the passen-
ger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
turned downward to the stored position.
Make sure you stored a parking posi-
tion for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror ( page 103).
1 Driver s side exterior rear view mirror
Make sure the MIRROR SETTING WHEN
button
PARKING function, found under the CON-
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir-
VENIENCE submenu in the control sys-
ror button
tem, is switched to ON ( page 135).
1 Headlamp washer switch
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
Switch on ignition.
Switch on ignition.
previously stored driving position:
Press button 2 for the passenger-side
Press switch 1.
10 seconds after you put the gear se-
exterior rear view mirror.
lector lever out of position R
The headlamps will be cleaned with a
Place the gear selector lever in reverse
high-pressure water jet.
immediately once you exceed a vehicle
gear R.
speed of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h)
The passenger-side exterior rear view
immediately when you press button 1
mirror will be turned downward to the
for driver s side exterior rear view mir-
stored position.
ror
153
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Warning! G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
1 Sun visor 3 Mirror cover
can endanger you and others.
2 Mounting 4 Mirror lamp
Swing sun visors 1 down to protect Make sure the ignition is switched on
against sun glare. and that the sun visor is engaged in
mounting 2.
If sunlight enters through a side win-
dow, disengage visor 1 from inner Open mirror cover 3.
mounting 2 and pivot it to the side.
Mirror lamps 4 switch on.
154
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster
! i
Heavy accumulation of snow and ice The rear window defroster uses a large
Turn the SmartKey in starter switch to
should be removed before activating amount of power. To keep the battery
position 2.
the defroster. drain to a minimum, turn off the de-
froster as soon as the rear window is
The defroster is automatically turned
Activating
clear.
off after approximately 6-17 minutes of
Press button F in the control panel
operation depending on the outside
of the climate control.
temperature and vehicle speed.
The indicator lamp in the button comes
If several power consumers are turned
on.
on simultaneously, or the battery is
only partially charged, it is possible that
Deactivating
the defroster will automatically turn it-
Press button F in the control panel self off.
of the climate control.
When this happens, the indicator lamp
The indicator lamp in the button goes inside the switch starts blinking.
out.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the defroster turns itself back
on.
155
Controls in detail
Climate control
Climate control
156
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Windshield defroster air vents 1 Air volume
2 Center air vent, adjustable 2 Temperature control, left
3 Thumbwheel for center air vent 3 Temperature control, right
4 Side air vent, adjustable 4 Air distribution control
5 Side defroster air vent, fixed 5 Rear window defroster ( page 155)
6 Thumbwheel for side air vent 6 AC cooling on /off (ACOFF)
7 Footwell air vents Residual engine heat utilization
(REST)
8 Climate control panel
Climate control panel
7 Air distribution and air volume (auto-
matic mode)
i
8 Air recirculation
For draft-free ventilation, move the slid-
ers for the center air vents to the mid-
9 Defrosting
dle position.
157
Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control is operational whenev- Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
i
er the engine is running. You can operate odors are filtered out before outside air en-
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the climate control system in either the au- ters the passenger compartment through
the interior before driving off.
tomatic or manual mode. The system cools the air distribution system.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
or heats the interior depending on the se-
The air conditioning will not engage (no
windshield free of snow and debris.
lected interior temperature and the cur-
cooling) if the ACOFF mode is selected
rent outside temperature.
( page 162).
Setting the temperature
Warning! G
Use temperature controls 2 and 3 to
Warning! G
separately adjust the air temperature on
When operating the automatic climate con-
Follow the recommended settings for heat- each side of the passenger compartment.
trol, the air that enters the passenger com-
ing and cooling given on the following pag- You should raise or lower the temperature
partment through the air vents in the
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up, setting in small increments, preferably
footwell can be very hot or very cold (de-
impairing visibility and endangering you and starting at 72�F (22�C).
pending on the set temperature). This may
others.
cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin
i
in the immediate area of the air vents. Al-
When operating the climate control
ways keep sufficient distance between un-
system in automatic mode, you will
protected parts of the body and the footwell
only rarely need to adjust the tempera-
air vents. If necessary, change the air flow
ture, air volume and air distribution.
using the air distribution controls to direct
the air away from the footwell air vents
( page 159).
158
Controls in detail
Climate control
Increasing Adjusting air distribution and volume Adjusting manually
Turn the temperature control a few de- Press the U button.
Use air distribution control 4
grees to the right.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
( page 157) to adjust the air distribution.
The climate control system will corre- The following symbols are found on the
out.
spondingly adjust the interior air tem- controls:
Select any of the six air volume speeds
perature.
and the air distribution.
Symbol Function
Decreasing a Directs air through the center,
side and rear passenger com-
Turn the temperature control a few de-
partment air vents
grees to the left.
Z Directs air to the windows
The climate control system will corre-
X Directs air into the entire vehi-
spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
cle interior
perature.
Y Directs air to the footwells
159
Controls in detail
Climate control
Adjusting automatically Defrosting Air recirculation
Press the U button.
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
Activating
The indicator lamp on the button
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
comes on. Air distribution and volume
Press button P. from the outside. This setting cuts off the
are adjusted automatically.
intake of outside air and recirculates the
The indicator lamp in the button illumi-
air in the passenger compartment.
nates.
Windshield fogged on the outside
The climate control automatically
Switch the windshield wipers on.
Warning! G
switches to the following functions:
Switch to manual mode.
maximum blower and heat output
When the outside temperature is below
Turn the air distribution control
41�F (5�C), only switch to air recirculation
air distribution to the windshield
to a or Y.
mode for short periods to prevent window
and the side windows
fogging.
rear ventilation is turned off
Activating
Deactivating
Press button O briefly.
Press the P button.
The indicator lamp in the button illumi-
The indicator lamp in the button goes
nates.
out. Defrosting is turned off.
160
Controls in detail
Climate control
Residual engine heat utilization Deactivating
i
The air recirculation mode is activated
Press button � again to switch off.
With the engine switched off, it is possible
automatically at high outside tempera-
The indicator lamp in the button goes
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
tures.
for a short while, depending on the temper- out.
If you have turned off the air condition-
ature setting of the climate control. Air vol-
The residual heat is automatically turned
er or the outside temperature is below
ume and distribution are controlled
off:
41�F (5�C), the air recirculation mode
automatically.
when the SmartKey in starter switch is
will not switch on automatically.
turned to position 2
Activating
Deactivating
after about 30 minutes
Turn the SmartKey in starter switch to
Press button O briefly. position 1 or 0 or remove it from the
if the battery voltage drops
starter switch.
The indicator lamp in the button goes
out. Press button �.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated The indicator lamp in the button comes
automatically: on.
after 30 minutes if the outside temper- Set the left and right temperature to
ature is above about 41�F (5�C) your personal requirements.
after 5 minutes if the outside tempera-
ture is below about 41�F (5�C)
after 5 minutes if economy mode
ACOFF is selected
161
Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating the climate control Air conditioning Activating
system
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
The air conditioning is operational while
dehumidify the air with the air conditioner.
the engine is running and cools the interior
Deactivating
Press button � again.
air to the temperature set by the operator.
Set the air volume control switch to
The indicator lamp on the button �
i
position 0.
goes out.
Condensation may drip out from under-
The air conditioner uses the refrigerant
neath the vehicle. This is normal and
Reactivating
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
not an indication of a malfunction.
Set the air volume control switch to any
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
speed.
Deactivating
!
It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
If the � button on the climate con-
tioning (cooling) function of the climate
trol panel starts to blink, this indicates
control system. The air in the vehicle will
that the air conditioner is losing refrig-
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
erant. The compressor has turned itself
off. The air conditioner cannot be
Press button �.
turned on again.
The indicator lamp on the button �
Have the air conditioner checked at
comes on.
the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
162
Controls in detail
Climate control
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents
1 Air volume control for center air vents
2 Left center air vent, adjustable
3 Right center air vent, adjustable
163
Controls in detail
Power windows
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows Opening the windows
Warning! G
Press switch 2 to 5 to the resistance
The side windows can be opened and
point.
When closing the windows, make sure there
closed electrically. The switches for all the
is no danger of anyone being harmed by the
The corresponding window will move
side windows are on the driver s door. The
closing procedure.
downwards until you release the
switches for the respective windows are
switch.
on the front passenger and the rear doors.
The closing procedure can be immediately
halted by releasing the switch or by releas-
Closing the windows
ing button 9 on the SmartKey.
Pull on switch 2 to 5.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from starter switch, and lock your
The corresponding window will move
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
upwards until you release the switch.
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
Fully opening windows (Express-open)
ment can cause an accident and/or serious
Press switch 2 to 5 past the resis-
personal injury.
tance point and release.
1 Switch for rear door window override
The corresponding window opens com-
Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
( page 71)
pletely.
position 1 or 2.
2 Left front window
3 Right front window
Stopping windows
4 Right rear window
Press or pull respective switch again.
5 Left rear window
164
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening and closing windows with the Opening (Summer opening feature) Closing (Convenience feature)
SmartKey
Press and hold button R
after un- Press and hold button 9 after lock-
The sliding/pop-up roof ( page 166) will locking the vehicle. ing the vehicle.
also be opened or closed when the power
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
windows are operated with the SmartKey.
begin to open after approximately one begin to close after approximately one
second. second.
Warning! G
Release transmit button to interrupt Release transmit button to interrupt
procedure. procedure.
Never operate the windows or slid-
Make sure all side windows and the slid-
ing/pop-up roof if there is the possibility of
ing/pop-up roof are properly closed before
anyone being harmed by the opening or
leaving the vehicle.
closing procedure.
In case the procedure causes potential dan-
ger, the procedure can be immediately halt-
ed by releasing the button on the SmartKey.
To reverse direction of movement,
press R
for opening or 9 for closing.
Aim transmitter eye at the driver s door
handle.
165
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof
Sliding/pop-up roof
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up
!
Warning! G
roof
To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges
When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, make
which can stick out of the
sure there is no danger of anyone being
sliding/pop-up roof.
harmed by the closing procedure.
Do not open the sliding/pop-up roof if
The closing procedure of the sliding/pop-up
there is snow or ice on the roof, as this
roof can be immediately halted by releasing
could result in malfunctions.
the switch.
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
or closed manually should an electrical
SmartKey from starter switch, and lock your
malfunction occur ( page 292).
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
1 Push up to raise roof at rear
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip- i
2 Pull down to lower roof at rear
ment can cause an accident and/or serious
3 Push forward to slide roof closed You can also open or close the
personal injury.
4 Push back to slide roof open sliding/pop-up roof using the
SmartKey (summer opening/conve-
With the roof closed or tilted open, a
nience feature) ( page 167).
screen can be slid into the roof opening to
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
roof open, the screen will also retract.
to position 1 or 2.
166
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up Fully opening (Express-open) Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up
roof roof with the SmartKey
To open the sliding/pop-up roof, move
To open, close, raise or lower the slid- the switch past the resistance point in The power windows ( page 164) will also
ing/pop-up roof, move the switch to direction 4 and release. be opened or closed when you operate the
the resistance point in the required sliding/pop-up roof with the SmartKey.
The sliding/pop up roof opens com-
direction 1 to 4.
pletely.
Release the switch when the roof has
Warning! G
reached the required position. Stopping the sliding/pop-up roof
Never operate the windows or slid-
Move the switch in any direction.
ing/pop-up roof if there is the possibility of
anyone being harmed by the opening or
i
closing procedure.
If the movement of the sliding/pop-up
roof is blocked during the closing pro- In case the procedure causes potential dan-
ger, the procedure can be immediately halt-
cedure, the roof will stop and reopen
ed by releasing the button on the SmartKey.
slightly.
To reverse direction of movement,
press R
for opening or 9 for closing.
Aim transmitter eye at the driver s door
handle.
167
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof
Opening (Summer opening feature) Closing (Convenience feature)
Press and hold button R
after un- Press and hold button 9 after lock-
locking the vehicle. ing the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
begin to open after approximately one begin to close after approximately one
second. second.
Release transmit button to interrupt Release transmit button to interrupt
procedure. procedure.
Make sure all side windows and the slid-
ing/pop-up roof are properly closed before
leaving the vehicle.
168
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are de- Cruise control
Warning! G
scribed on the following pages:
Cruise control automatically maintains the
Cruise control, with which the vehicle
Cruise control is a convenience system de-
speed you set for your vehicle.
can maintain a preset speed.
signed to assist the driver during vehicle op-
Use of cruise control is recommended for
eration. The driver is and must always
Rear Parking Assist*, with which you
driving at a constant speed for extended
remain responsible for the vehicle speed
can assist your parking maneuvers.
periods of time. You can set or resume
and for safe brake operation.
The BAS, ABS, ESP, 4-ETS and EBB driving
cruise control at any speed over 20 mph
Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
systems are described in the  Safety and
(30 km/h).
and weather conditions make it advisable to
Security section ( page 74).
The cruise control function is operated by
travel at a steady speed.
means of the cruise control lever.
The use of cruise control can be danger-
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
lever found on the left-hand side of the
because conditions do not allow safe
steering column ( page 23).
driving at a steady speed.
The use of cruise control can be danger-
i
ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
The cruise control should not be acti-
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
vated during-off road driving.
loss of control.
Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The  Resume function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
169
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i !
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise Moving gear selector lever to
control may not be able to maintain the position N while driving also cancels
set speed. Once the grade eases, the cruise control. However, the gear se-
set speed will be resumed. lector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skid-
Canceling cruise control
ding (e.g. on icy roads).
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
i
1 Set current or higher speed
Step on the brake pedal.
The last stored speed is canceled when
2 Set current or lower speed
or
you turn off the engine.
3 Cancel cruise control
4 Resume at last set speed
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Setting current speed
Cruise control will be canceled. The
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
last speed set will be stored for later
speed.
use.
Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
The current speed is set.
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
170
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed Setting to last stored speed
i
( Resume function)
When you use the cruise control lever
Lift the cruise control lever to
position 1 and hold it up until the de- to decelerate, the transmission will au-
tomatically downshift if the engine s
sired speed is reached.
Warning! G
braking power does not brake the vehi-
Release the cruise control lever.
cle sufficiently. The speed stored in memory should only be
The new speed is set.
set again if prevailing road conditions per-
mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
i
differences arising from returning to preset
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
speed could endanger yourself and others.
not deactivate the cruise control. After
Faster
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
cruise control will resume the last
position 4.
direction of arrow 1.
speed set.
Cruise control will resume the last set
Slower
speed.
Setting a lower speed
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
Remove your foot from the accelerator
Depress the cruise control lever to
direction of arrow 2.
pedal.
position 2 and hold it down until the
desired speed is reached.
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
171
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Rear Parking Assist* The Rear Parking Assist system monitors
Interference caused by other ultrasonic sig-
the rear area of your vehicle by means of
nals (e.g. working jackhammers or the air
four sensors in the rear bumper.
brakes of trucks) can cause the system to
Warning! G
send erratic indications, and should be tak-
en into consideration.
Rear Parking Assist (rear Parktronic) is a
supplemental system. It is not intended to,
nor does it replace, the need for extreme
Warning! G
care. The responsibility during parking and
other critical maneuvers always rests with
Make sure no persons or animals are in the
the driver.
area in which you are maneuvering. You
Special attention must be paid to objects
could otherwise injure them.
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
1 Sensors
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or
The Rear Parking Assist system is an elec-
street curbs). Such objects may not be de-
tronic aid designed to assist the driver dur-
tected by the system and can damage the
ing parking maneuvers. It visually and
vehicle.
audibly indicates the relative distance be-
The operational function of the Rear Parking
tween the rear of the vehicle and an obsta-
Assist can be affected by dirty sensors, es-
cle.
pecially at times of snow and ice. See
The Rear Parking Assist system is auto-
 Cleaning the Rear Parking Assist sensors
matically activated when you switch on the
( page 247).
ignition and shift the gear selector lever to
position R.
172
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Range of the sensors Minimum distance
Center approx. 59.1 in (150 cm)
To function properly, the sensors must be The minimum distance between the sen-
Corners approx. 40 in (100 cm)
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the sors and an obstacle is approximately
sensors regularly, being careful not to 20 in (50 cm). If you encounter an obstacle
!
scratch or damage them. in this range, all the warning lamps come
During parking maneuvers, pay special
on and you hear a warning signal. If the ob-
attention to objects located above or
stacle is closer than the minimum dis-
below the height of the sensors (e.g.
tance, the actual distance may no longer
planters or trailer hitches). The Rear
be indicated by the system.
Parking Assist system will not detect
such objects at close range and dam-
age to your vehicle or the object may
result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sourc-
es (e.g. truck air brakes or jackham-
mers) may impair the operation of the
Rear Parking Assist system.
173
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicator An intermittent acoustic warning will no segments come on and no warning
sound when the first yellow segment sounds
Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel-
comes on. This signal quickens with each
ative distance between the sensors and an The Rear Parking Assist is malfunction-
additional segment lit. When all segments
obstacle. The warning indicator is located ing.
illuminate, the acoustic warning becomes
next to the tailgate.
Have the Rear Parking Assist sys-
a constant signal. The signal is canceled
tem checked by an authorized
when the gear selector lever is placed in
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
position D or P.
as soon as possible.
Rear Parking Assist malfunction
Malfunction may also be caused by inter-
ference from other radio or ultrasonic sig-
There is a malfunction in the Rear Parking
nals.
Assist system if:
Check the Rear Parking Assist opera-
a low warning tone sounds while the
tion at another location to rule out in-
vehicle is reversing
terference from outside radio or
The Rear Parking Assist sensors are
Warning indicator
ultrasonic signals.
dirty or malfunctioning.
As your vehicle approaches an object, one
or more segments will come on, depending Clean the Rear Parking Assist sys-
on the distance. When the sixth segment tem sensors ( page 247).
lights, you have reached the minimum dis-
Switch on the ignition again.
tance.
174
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading
Roof rack Cargo compartment cover Rolling up the cover
Grip the cover strap and remove it from
This vehicle is not intended to carry items
the mountings on both sides.
on its roof. Thus roof rails and any
Guide it slowly back into place.
roof-mounted devices must not be used.
Warning! G
Do not load items on the roof. It may cause
instability during some maneuvers which
could result in an accident.
1 Rear seat bench cover
2 Tailgate cover
Pull cover 1 out. Hook it into the
mountings on the rear seat bench.
Pull cover 2 out. Hook it into the
mountings to the left and right of the
tailgate.
175
Controls in detail
Loading
Removing and installing the cover Enlarged cargo compartment Split rear seat bench
The rear seat bench can be folded and low-
ered to increase the cargo compartment.
The left, right or both seat backrests sec-
tions may folded down according to need.
Warning! G
Always lock seat backrest in its upright po-
sition when rear seat bench is occupied by
passengers, or cargo is being carried behind
Removing the cover 1 Lever for seat backrest sections
the seat bench.
2 Lever for seat bench sections
Open latch 1 on right and left side in
To help avoid personal injury from smaller
direction of arrow. The rear seat bench can be folded and low-
objects flying in the occupant area during a
ered to enlarge the cargo compartment.
Pull cover 2 out upwards.
collision or sudden maneuver, always use
The left, right or both seat backrest sec-
partition net when transporting cargo
tions may be folded down as required.
Installing the cover
( page 178).
Place cover into recesses.
For more information, see  Split rear seat
Press right and left sides of cover down
bench ( page 176).
until it locks into place.
176
Controls in detail
Loading
Folding seat backrest forward Returning seat bench and seat back-
Warning! G
rest to sitting position
Remove the head restraints
( page 96). Fold up seat bench until it locks in
Failure to assure that seats and seat back-
place.
rest are locked into place could result in an
Pull release lever 1 in direction of ar-
increased chance of injury in an accident.
row and fold seat backrest forward un- Pull release lever 1 and raise seat
til it locks in place. backrest until it locks in place.
Never place hands under seat or near any
moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
Check to ensure the seat is locked by
Folding seat bench forward
pushing and pulling on the seat back-
For safety reasons, the rear seat bench
Fold seat backrest forward. rest.
must only be adjusted when the vehicle is
stationary.
Pull release lever 2 in direction of ar-
row and fold seat bench forward to- Warning! G
Never ride vehicle with the tailgate open.
gether with the seat backrest.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
Failure to assure that seats and seat back-
enter vehicle interior resulting in uncon-
rests are locked into place could result in an
sciousness and death.
increased chance of injury in an accident.
!
Before folding the seat backrest for-
ward and the rear seat bench down, be
sure that all containers in the rear cup
holder are removed.
177
Controls in detail
Loading
Partition net* (MB Accessory) The partition net can be installed behind Installation behind rear seat bench
the seat backrests of the rear seat bench,
Use of the partition net is a particularly im-
or behind the front seats if the rear seat
portant safety factor when the vehicle is
bench is folded down.
loaded higher than the top of the seat
i
backrests with smaller objects.
Installation can be performed by open-
While the partition net will help protect you
ing the rear doors.
from smaller objects, it cannot prevent the
movement of large, heavier objects into
the passenger area in an accident. Such
items must be properly secured using the
1 Partition net
cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compart-
2 Mounting
ment floor.
Fold the rear seat bench forward
( page 176).
i
This cannot be done by folding the rear
seat backrest forward.
Hook partition net 1 in mountings 2
on both sides.
178
Controls in detail
Loading
Installation behind front seats
5 Hook
3 Lift tensioner
6 Ring
4 Tie down 1 Partition net
2 Mounting
Set the length of the tie downs 4 and
Lift tensioner 3 on tie downs 4 must
lift tensioner 3 to the rings 6.
point in the direction of the arrow. Fold rear seat bench fully forward
( page 176).
Insert tie down hooks 5 in rings 6.
Engage partition net 1 in holders 2.
Pull on loose ends of tie downs until net
is slightly tensioned.
Fold up seat bench until it locks in
place.
The partition net will be tightened by
the rear seat bench cushion.
After driving a short period, check the ten-
sion of the partition net, retighten if neces-
sary.
179
Controls in detail
Loading
Removing partition net Loading instructions
Lift tensioner upward to a horizontal
position to release tensioning of strap.
Disengage tie down hooks from rings.
Remove partition net from holders.
Storing partition net
Roll up partition net and secure it.
3 Lift tensioner
Store partition net behind rear seat
4 Tie down
bench.
The gross vehicle weight which is the
5 Hook
weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools,
6 Ring
spare wheel, installed accessories, pas-
Lift tensioner 3 must point in the direc-
sengers and luggage/cargo must never
tion of the cargo compartment.
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) for your vehicle. In addition, the
Set the length of tie downs 4 and lift
load must be distributed in such a way so
tensioner 3 to the rings 6.
that the weight on each axle never exceeds
Insert tie down hooks 5 in rings 6.
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
the front and rear axle. The GVWR and
Pull loose ends of tie downs 4 until
GAWR for your vehicle are indicated on the
net is tight.
certification label which can be found on
After driving a short-distance, check the
the left door pillar ( page 326).
tension of the partition net, retighten if
necessary.
180
Controls in detail
Loading
The handling characteristics of a fully load- For additional safety when transporting
Never ride vehicle with the tailgate open.
ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis- cargo while the rear seats are unoccu-
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
tribution. It is therefore recommended to pied, fasten the outer seat belts cross-
enter vehicle interior resulting in uncon-
load the vehicle according to the illustra- wise into the opposite side buckles.
sciousness and death.
tions shown, with the heaviest items being
Always pad off sharp edges.
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
i
The rear cargo compartment is the pre-
Warning! G
ferred place to carry objects. The en-
Always fasten items being carried as secure- larged cargo compartment (rear seats
ly as possible using cargo tie-down rings and folded) should only be used for items
fastening materials appropriate for the which do not fit in the rear cargo com-
weight and size of the load. partment alone.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and can cause in- Always place items being carried
against front or rear seat backrests,
jury to vehicle occupants unless the items
and fasten them as securely as possi-
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
ble.
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, always use parti- The heaviest portion of the cargo
tion net when transporting cargo. should always be kept as low as possi-
ble against front or rear seat backrest
since it influences the handling charac-
teristics of the vehicle.
181
Controls in detail
Loading
Cargo tie-down rings
Warning! G
While the partition net will help protect you
from smaller objects, it cannot prevent the
movement of large, heavier objects into the
passenger area in an accident.
Such items must be properly secured using
the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo com-
partment floor.
The cargo compartment is provided with
four tie-down anchors.
Carefully secure cargo by applying even
load on all rings with rope of sufficient
strength to hold down the cargo.
182
Controls in detail
Useful features
Useful features
Interior storage spaces Opening the glove box
Warning! G
Pull handle to open.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
The glove box is illuminated with SmartKey
Warning! G
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
in starter switch position 1 or 2 when
To help avoid personal injury during a colli- about and injuring vehicle occupants during
opening the lid.
an accident and sudden maneuvers.
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
i
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
The glove box can be locked and un-
gage or cargo in the cargo compartment if
Glove box
locked with the mechanical key.
possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher
than the seat backs.
Closing the glove box
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Push lid up to close.
Warning! G
Do not load items on the roof. It may cause
instability during some maneuvers which
1 Unlocked position
could result in an accident.
2 Locked position
3 Handle
183
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartments below the arm- Closing small compartment Storage compartment in front of arm-
rest rest
Lower armrest until it engages in lock.
Opening
i
Located in the cover of the storage
Slide cover 3 backward.
compartment is a storage area for
small items such as checks.
Closing
Slide cover 3 forward.
Opening large compartment
Press button 2 and lift armrest.
Closing large compartment
Opening small compartment
Lower armrest until it engages in lock.
Press button 1 and lift armrest.
i
In the large storage compartment there
is a storage area for up to three CDs.
184
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holders Cup holder next to the armrest Cup holder in front passenger footwell
Warning! G
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. Place only containers that fit into the
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to
a height where the contents, especially hot
liquids, could spill during vehicle maneu-
vers.
Place cup holder bracket 1 into re- Swing bracket 1 upwards until it
cess. clicks into place.
If the cup holder is no longer in use, it can
!
for example, be stored in the storage com-
Fold the cup holder closed before mov-
partment below the armrest or in storage
ing the front passenger seat fully for-
pouch on the door panel.
ward.
185
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in rear passenger footwell Parcel net in front passenger footwell Ashtrays
A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
Center console ashtray
small and light items, such as road maps,
mail, etc.
Warning! G
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or ob-
jects having sharp edges in the parcel net.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
!
den maneuvers, they could be thrown
Before folding the seat backrest for-
around inside the vehicle and cause injury to
ward and the rear seat bench down, be
1 Ashtray
vehicle occupants.
sure that all containers in the rear cup
2 Cigarette lighter
holder are removed.
3 Cover plate
!
Opening ashtray
When large objects are stored in the
parcel net, do not slide the seat fully
Briefly push the cover plate 3.
forward, it could damage them.
The ashtray opens automatically.
186
Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing the ashtray insert Press sliding knob 4 to the right. Opening ashtray
The insert will protrude a short-dis- Pull at top of cover 1.
tance.
Warning! G
Removing the ashtray insert
Remove insert 5 in direction of arrow.
Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing
Push down on catch 2.
still. Turn off the engine and set the parking
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
Pull out the ashtray insert 3.
brake. Otherwise the vehicle might move as
Press the insert into the frame until it
a result of unintended contact with the gear
snaps into place. Reinstalling the ashtray insert
selector lever.
Position the insert and close the cover.
Rear passenger compartment
4 Sliding knob
1 Cover
5 Astray insert
2 Catch
3 Ashtray insert
187
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cigarette lighter Electrical outlet
Warning! G
The lighter socket can be used to accom-
Never touch the heating element or sides of
modate electrical accessories up to a
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
maximum of 180 W.
knob only.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch. Do not
N
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
Electrical outlet
injury.
An electrical outlet is located in the rear
passenger footwell.
1 Cigarette lighter
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2.
Briefly touch the cover plate.
Flip up cover and insert electrical plug
The ashtray opens automatically.
(cigarette lighter type).
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2.
i
The electrical outlet can be used to ac-
Push in cigarette lighter 1.
commodate electrical consumers (e.g.
The lighter will pop out automatically
air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a max-
when hot.
imum of 180 W.
188
Controls in detail
Useful features
Telephone* You can take and place telephone calls us-
Warning! G
ing the � and � buttons on the
steering wheel. Use the control system for
Please do not forget that your primary re-
Warning! G
performing other telephone functions
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver s
( page 137).
attention to the road must always be
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
See separate instruction manual for infor-
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- his/her primary focus when driving. For
mation on how to operate the telephone.
your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
out being connected to an external antenna)
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- and stop before placing or taking a tele-
Warning! G
tion of the vehicle s electronic system, pos- phone call.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
using a cellular telephone while driving a ve-
personal injury.
driving, please use the hands-free device
hicle. Whether or not prohibited by law, for
and only use the telephone when road, traf-
safety reasons, the driver should not use the
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele- fic and weather conditions permit. Some ju-
cellular telephone while the vehicle is in mo-
phone or a citizens band unit, should only risdictions prohibit the driver from using a
tion.
be used inside the vehicle if they are con- cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
nected to an antenna that is installed on Stop the vehicle in a safe location before an-
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man-
the outside of the vehicle. swering or placing a call.
agement and Data System)1 if road, traffic
and weather conditions permit.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho-
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
for information on the installation of an ap-
covering a distance of approx. 44 feet (ap-
proved external antenna. Refer to the radio
proximately 13.5 m) every second.
transmitter operation instructions regard-
1
Observe all legal requirements
ing use of an external antenna.
189
Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid The Tele Aid system
i
The SOS button is located above the in-
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
!
terior rear view mirror.
Demand)
The initial activation of the Tele Aid sys-
The Roadside Assistance button "
The Tele Aid system consists of three
tem may only be performed by com-
and the Information button Ą are
types of response:
pleting the subscriber agreement and
located below the center armrest cov-
Automatic and manual emergency
placing an acquaintance call using the
er.
SOS button. Failure to complete either
Roadside Assistance and
of these steps will result in a system
Shortly after the completion of your ac-
Information
that is not activated. If the system is
quaintance call, you will receive a user ID
not activated, the indicator lamp in the
The Tele Aid system is operational provid-
and password via first call mail. By visiting
SOS button stays on after turning
ing that the vehicle s battery is charged,
www.mbusa.com and selecting  Tele Aid
SmartKey in starter switch to
properly connected, not damaged and cel-
(USA only), you will have access to account
position 2 and the message TELE AID
lular and GPS coverage is available.
information, remote door unlock, profile
EMERG. CALL  NOT ACTIVATED will be
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can and more.
shown in the multifunction display for
be adjusted when using the volume control
approx. 10 seconds.
!
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
If you have any questions regarding ac- The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
raise, press button ć and to lower,
tivation, please call the Response Cen- network for communication and the
press button �.
ter at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or GPS (Global Positioning System) satel-
To activate, press the SOS button, the
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). lites for vehicle location. If either of
Roadside Assistance button " or
these signals are unavailable, the
the Information button Ą, depend-
Tele Aid system may not function and if
ing on the type of response required.
this occurs, assistance must be sum-
moned by other means.
190
Controls in detail
Useful features
System self-check Emergency calls
Warning! G
Initially, after turning the SmartKey in An emergency call is initiated automatical-
starter switch to position 2, malfunctions ly:
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
are detected and indicated (the indicator
the Roadside Assistance button and/or in
following an accident in which the
lamps in the SOS button, the Roadside As-
the Information button do not come on dur- emergency tensioning devices (ETDs)
sistance button " and the Information
ing the system self-check or if any of these
or airbags deploy
button Ą stay on longer than
indicators remain illuminated constantly in
if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
10 seconds or do not come on). The mes-
red and/or the message TELE AID -
alarm stays on for more than
sage TELE AID  DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! ap-
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP is displayed in the
20 seconds. See anti-theft alarm sys-
pears for approx. 10 seconds in the
multifunction display after the system
tem ( page 82) and tow-away alarm
multifunction display.
self-check, a malfunction in the system has
( page 83)
been detected.
An emergency call can also be initiated
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
manually by opening the cover next to the
above, the system may not operate as ex-
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
pected. Have the system checked at the
briefly pressing the button located under
nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
the cover. See below for instructions on
as soon as possible.
initiating an emergency call manually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message EMERGENCY CALL 
CONNECTING CALL appears in the multifunc-
tion display. When the connection is estab-
lished, the message EMERGENCY CALL 
CALL CONNECTED appears in the
191
Controls in detail
Useful features
multifunction display. All information rele- The Tele Aid system is available if:
Warning! G
vant to the emergency, such as the loca-
it has been activated and is operation-
tion of the vehicle (determined by the GPS
al. Activation requires a subscription
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is il-
satellite location system), vehicle model,
for monitoring services, connection
luminated continuously and there was no
identification number and color are gener-
and cellular air time
voice connection to the Response Center
ated.
established, then the Tele Aid system could
the relevant cellular phone network
A voice connection between the Response
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
and GPS signals are available and pass
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
the information on to the response cen- vant cellular phone network is not available).
will be established automatically soon af-
The message EMERGENCY CALL 
ter
ter the emergency call has been initiated.
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction
When a voice connection is established the
i
display for approx. 10 seconds.
audio system mutes and the message
Location of the vehicle on a map is only
Should this occur, assistance must be sum-
TELE AID  EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE ap-
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
moned by other means.
pears in the multifunction display. The Re-
signals from the GPS satellite network
sponse Center will attempt to determine
and pass the information on to the re-
more precisely the nature of the accident
sponse center.
provided they can speak to an occupant of
the vehicle.
192
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually Wait for a voice connection to the Re- Roadside Assistance button "
sponse Center.
Located below the center armrest cover is
Close the cover 1 after the emergen- the Roadside Assistance button " .
cy call is concluded.
Press and hold the button (for longer
than two seconds).
Warning! G
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside As-
sistance dispatcher will be initiated.
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
The button will flash while the call is in
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, ve-
progress. The message TELE-DIAGNO-
hicle in a dangerous road location), please
SIS  CONNECTING CALL will appear in
do not wait for voice contact after you have
the multifunction display.
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
When the connection is established, the
leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-
message TELE-DIAGNOSIS 
tion. The Response Center will automatically
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunc-
contact local emergency officials with the
tion display. The Tele Aid system will trans-
vehicle s approximate location if they re-
1 Cover
mit data generating the vehicle
ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
2 SOS button
identification number, model, color and lo-
make voice contact with the vehicle occu-
Briefly press on cover 1.
cation (subject to availability of cellular
pants.
The cover opens. and GPS signals).
Press SOS button 2 briefly. A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
of the vehicle will be established. When a
flashes until the emergency call is con-
voice connection is established the audio
cluded.
193
Controls in detail
Useful features
system mutes and the message TELE AID
i Roadside Assistance calls can be ter-
 ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE ap-
minated using the � button on the
The indicator lamp in the Roadside As-
pears in the multifunction display.
multifunction steering wheel.
sistance button " remains illumi-
Describe the nature of the need for as- nated in red for approx. 10 seconds
Information button Ą
during the system self-check after turn-
sistance.
ing the SmartKey in the starter switch
Located below the center armrest cover is
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
to position 2 (together with the SOS
the Information button Ą.
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
button and the Information
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
Press and hold the button (for longer
button Ą).
tow your vehicle to the nearest
than 2 seconds).
See system self-check ( page 191)
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. For
A call to the Customer Assistance Cen-
when the indicator lamp does not come
services such as labor and/or towing,
ter will be initiated. The button will
on in red or stays on longer than ap-
charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside
flash while the call is in progress. The
proximately ten seconds.
Assistance manual for more information.
message INFO  CONNECTING CALL will
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside
These programs are only available in the
appear in the multifunction display.
Assistance button " is illuminated
USA:
When the connection is established, the
continuously and there was no voice
Sign and Drive services: Services such
message INFO  CALL CONNECTED appears
connection to the Response Center es-
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid
tablished, then the Tele Aid system
the replacement of a flat tire with the
system will transmit data generating the
could not initiate a Roadside Assis-
vehicle spare tire are obtainable
vehicle identification number, model, color
tance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
and location (subject to availability of cel-
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This func- phone network was not available). The
lular and GPS signals).
tion permits the Mercedes-Benz Road- message TELE-DIAGNOSIS 
side Assistance dispatcher to
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunc-
download malfunction codes and actu- tion display.
al vehicle data.
194
Controls in detail
Useful features
A voice connection between the Customer
See system self-check ( page 191) !
Assistance Center representative and the
when the indicator lamp does not come
If the indicator lamps do not start flash-
occupants of the vehicle will be estab-
on in red or stays on longer than ap-
ing after pressing one of the buttons or
lished. When a voice connection is estab-
proximately ten seconds.
remains illuminated (in red) at any
lished the audio system mutes and the
time, the Tele Aid system has detected
If the indicator lamp in the Information
message TELE AID  INFO CALL ACTIVE
a fault or the service is not currently ac-
button Ą is illuminated continuous-
appears in the multifunction display. Infor-
tive, and may not initiate a call. Visit
ly and there was no voice connection to
mation regarding the operation of your ve-
your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
the Response Center established, then
hicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light
ter and have the system checked or
the Tele Aid system could not initiate
Truck Center or Mercedes-Benz USA prod-
contact the Response Center at
an Information call (e.g. the relevant
ucts and services is available to you.
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
cellular phone network is not avail-
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
able). The message INFO 
as possible.
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunc-
use your ID and password (sent to you sep-
tion display.
arately) to learn more (USA only).
Information calls can be terminated us-
ing the � button on the multifunc-
i
tion steering wheel.
The indicator lamp in the Information
button Ą remains illuminated in red
for approx. ten seconds during the sys-
tem self-check after turning SmartKey
in the starter switch to position 2 (to-
gether with the SOS button and the
Roadside Assistance button " ).
195
Controls in detail
Useful features
Upgrade Signals
! i
If the indicator lamp continues to flash When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
The Tele Aid system processes calls using
or the system does not reset, contact the COMAND system audio is muted
the following priority.
the Response Center at and the selected mode (radio or CD)
Automatic emergency  First priority
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or pauses. The optional cellular phone (if
Manual emergency  Second priority
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or installed) switches off. If you must use
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance this phone, the vehicle must be parked.
Roadside assistance  Third priority
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes Disconnect the coiled cord and place
Information  Fourth priority
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Cus- the call. The navigation system (if en-
tomer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in gaged) will continue to run. The display
Should a higher priority call be initiated
Canada. in the instrument cluster is available for
while you are connected, an upgrade (al-
use and spoken commands are only
ternating) tone will be heard and the ap-
available by pressing the RPT button on
propriate indicator lamp will flash. If
i
the COMAND unit. A pop-up window
certain information such as vehicle identi-
The indicator lamp in the respective
will appear in the COMAND display to
fication number or customer information is
button flashes until the call is conclud-
indicate that a Tele Aid call is in
not available, the operator may need to re-
ed. Calls can only be terminated by a
progress.
transmit.
Response Center or Customer Assis-
tance Center representative, except
During this time you will hear a beep and
Roadside Assistance and Information
voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
calls, which can also be terminated by
contact will resume once the retransmis-
pressing button � on the multifunc-
sion is completed. Once a call is conclud-
tion steering wheel.
ed, a beep will be heard and the
appropriate indicator lamp will stop flash-
ing. The COMAND system operation will
resume.
196
Controls in detail
Useful features
Remote door unlock The Response Center will then unlock your Stolen vehicle tracking services
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
In case you have locked your vehicle unin- In the event your vehicle was stolen:
feature.
tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
Report the incident to the police.
and the reserve key is not handy:
i
The police will issue a numbered inci-
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
The remote door unlock feature is avail-
dent report.
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
able if the relevant cellular phone net-
Pass this number on to the
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
work is available.
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
You will be asked to provide your pass- The SOS button will flash and the mes-
with your password issued to you when
word which you provided when you
sage EMERGENCY CALL 
you subscribed to the service.
completed the subscriber agreement.
CALL CONNECTED will appear in the mul-
The Response Center will then attempt
tifunction display to indicate receipt of
Then return to your vehicle and press
to covertly contact the vehicle s
the door unlock command.
the tailgate lock for minimum of
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is lo-
20 seconds until the SOS button is
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Re-
cated, the Response Center will con-
flashing.
sponse Center specialist will attempt
tact the local law enforcement and you.
to establish voice contact with the ve-
The message EMERGENCY CALL  The vehicle s location will only be pro-
hicle occupants.
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multi- vided to law enforcement.
function display.
If the tailgate lock was pressed for
more than 20 seconds before door un-
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi-
lock authorization was received by the
cle via Internet using the ID and password
Response Center, you must wait
sent to you shortly after the completion of
15 minutes before pressing the tailgate
your acquaintance call.
lock again.
197
Controls in detail
Useful features
Garage door opener
Warning! G
The built-in remote control is capable of
Before programming the integrated remote
operating up to three separately controlled
control to a garage door opener or gate op-
devices, for example garage door openers,
erator, make sure people and objects are
gate openers, or other devices compatible
out of the way of the device to prevent po-
with HomeLink� or some other systems.
tential harm or damage.
You can program the signal transmitter
When programming a garage door opener,
buttons.
the door moves up or down. When program-
Remote control integrated into the interior
ming a gate operator, the gate opens or
rear view mirror
closes.
1 Indicator lamp
Do not use the integrated remote control
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button
with any garage door opener that lacks safe-
ty stop and reverse features as required by
5 Hand-held transmitter button
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes
6 Hand-held remote control trans-
any garage door opener model manufac-
mitter (not part of the vehicle
tured before April 1, 1982). A garage door
equipment)
that cannot detect an object - signaling the
door to stop and reverse - does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards.
198
Controls in detail
Useful features
Programming or reprogramming the in-
i i
tegrated remote control
Certain types of garage door openers For operation in the USA only:
are incompatible with the integrated This device complies with Part 15 of
Step 1:
opener. If you should experience diffi- the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
Switch on ignition.
culties with programming the transmit- the following two conditions:
Step 2:
ter, contact your authorized
(1) This device may not cause harmful
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, or
If you have previously programmed an
interference, and
call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
integrated signal transmitter button
(2) this device must accept any inter-
tance Center (in the USA only) at
and wish to retain its programming,
ference received, including interfer-
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press
ence that may cause undesired
Service (in Canada) at
and hold the two outer signal transmit-
operation.
1-800-387-0100.
ter buttons 2 and 4 and release
Any unauthorized modification to this
them only when the indicator light be-
device could void the user s authority
gins to flash after approximately 20
to operate the equipment.
seconds (do not hold the button for
longer than 30 seconds). This proce-
dure erases any previous settings for
all three channels and initializes the
memory. If you later wish to program a
second and/or third hand-held trans-
mitter to the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this
step and begin directly with step 3.
199
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 3:
i i
The indicator lamp 1 flashes the first If the indicator lamp 1 blinks rapidly
Hold the end of the hand-held remote
time the signal transmitter button is for about two seconds and then turns
control transmitter 6 of the device
programmed. If this button has already to a constant light, continue with pro-
you wish to train approximately 2 to
been programmed, the indicator lamp gramming steps 8 through 12 as your
5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the surface
of the integrated remote control locat- will only start flashing after 20 sec- garage door opener may be equipped
onds. with the  rolling code feature.
ed on the interior rear view mirror,
keeping the indicator lamp 1 in view.
Step 5: Step 7:
Step 4:
When the indicator lamp 1 flashes To program the remaining two buttons,
Using both hands, simultaneously
rapidly, release both buttons. repeat the steps above starting with
press the hand-held transmitter
step 3.
button 5 and the desired integrated
Step 6:
signal transmitter button (2, 3
Press and hold the just-trained inte-
Rolling code programming
or 4). Do not release the buttons until
grated signal transmitter button and
completing step 5.
To train a garage door opener (or other roll-
observe the indicator lamp 1.
ing code devices) with the rolling code fea-
The indicator lamp 1 on the integrat-
If the indicator lamp 1 stays on con-
ture, follow these instructions after
ed remote control will flash, first slowly
stantly, programming is complete and
completing the  Programming portion
and then rapidly.
your device should activate when the
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
integrated signal transmitter button is
person may make the following training
pressed and released.
procedures quicker and easier.)
Step 8:
Locate  training button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
200
Controls in detail
Useful features
Exact location and color of the button Some garage door openers (or other rolling If you live in Canada or if you are having dif-
may vary by garage door opener brand. code equipped devices) may require you to ficulties programming a gate operator (re-
Depending on manufacturer, the  train- perform this procedure a third time to gardless of where you live) by using the
ing button may also be referred to as complete the training. programming procedures, replace step 4
 learn or  smart button. If there is dif- with the following:
Step 12:
ficulty locating the transmitting button,
Step 4:
Confirm the garage door operation by
refer to the garage door opener opera-
pressing the programmed integrated Continue to press and hold the inte-
tor s manual.
signal transmitter button (2, 3 grated signal transmitter button (2,
Step 9:
or 4). 3 or 4) while you press and re-press
Press  training button on the garage ( cycle ) your hand-held remote con-
Step 13:
door opener motor head unit. trol transmitter 6 every two seconds
To program the remaining two buttons,
until the frequency signal has bee-
The  training light is activated.
repeat the steps above starting with
learned. Upon successful training, the
You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow- step 3.
indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and
ing step.
then rapidly after several seconds.
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Step 10:
Proceed with programming step 5 and
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
step 6 to complete.
Firmly press, hold for two seconds and
transmitter signals to  time-out (or quit)
release the programmed integrated
after several seconds of transmission
signal transmitter button (2, 3
which may not be long enough for the inte-
or 4).
grated signal transmitter to pick up the sig-
Step 11:
nal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
Press, hold for two seconds and re-
are designed to  time-out in the same
lease same button a second time to
manner.
complete the training process.
201
Controls in detail
Useful features
Operation of integrated remote control Erasing the integrated remote control Reprogramming a single integrated sig-
memory nal transmitter button
Switch on ignition.
Switch on ignition. To program a device using a signal trans-
Select and press the appropriate inte-
mitter button previously trained, follow
grated signal transmitter button (2, Simultaneously hold down the signal
these steps:
3 or 4) to activate the remote con- transmitter buttons 2 and 4, for ap-
trolled device. proximately 20 seconds, until the indi- Press and hold the desired signal trans-
cator lamp 1 blinks rapidly. Do not mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not re-
The integrated remote control trans-
hold for longer than 30 seconds. lease the button.
mitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed  up to The codes of all three channels are The indicator lamp will begin to flash af-
20 seconds. erased. ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the
integrated signal transmitter button,
i
proceed with programming starting
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
with step 3.
of all three channels.
202
Controls in detail
Useful features
Heated steering wheel Switching on
Switch on the ignition.
The steering wheel heater warms up the
All lamps in the instrument cluster
leather area of the steering wheel.
come on.
The stalk with the heated steering wheel
Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc-
switch is on the lower left-hand side of the
tion of arrow 1.
steering wheel.
The steering wheel is heated. Indicator
lamp 3 comes on.
Switching off
Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc-
tion of arrow 2.
The steering wheel heater is turned off.
Indicator lamp 3 goes out.
i
1 Switching on
2 Switching off The steering wheel heater does not
3 Indicator lamp turn off automatically.
203
204
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Battery
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
205
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the  Operation section you will find de- The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
!
tailed information on operating, maintain- during the break-in period, the more satis-
Additional instructions for AMG vehi-
ing and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later
cles:
on.
During the first 1000 miles
Drive your vehicle during the first
(1500 km), do not exceed a speed
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
of 85 mph (140 km/h).
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
During this period, avoid engine
During this period, avoid heavy loads
speeds above 4500 rpm in each
(full throttle driving) and excessive en-
gear.
gine speeds (no more than 2/3 of maxi-
mum rpm in each gear).
All of the above instructions, as may apply
Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
to your vehicle type, also apply when driv-
ing the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
engine, the transfer case, the front differ-
down by shifting to a lower gear using
ential or the rear differential has been re-
the gear selector lever.
placed.
Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill i
driving).
Always obey applicable speed limits.
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may grad-
ually increase vehicle and engine speeds
to the permissible maximum.
206
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving instructions
Drive sensibly  save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, de-
pends on driving habits and operating con- Warning! G Warning! G
ditions.
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs Keep driver s foot area clear at all times. Ob-
To save fuel you should:
and driving are very dangerous combina- jects stored in this area may impair pedal
Keep tires at the recommended infla-
tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or movement.
tion pressures.
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgement.
Remove unnecessary loads.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac-
Allow engine to warm up under low
cident are greatly increased when you drink
load use.
or take drugs and drive.
Avoid frequent acceleration and decel-
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
eration.
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
Have all maintenance work performed
taking drugs.
at the intervals specified in the Service
Booklet and as required by the FSS.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driv-
ing in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly country.
207
Operation
Driving instructions
Power assistance
!
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
Be very careful not to endanger other
cause excessive and premature wear of the
road users when you apply the brakes.
brake pads.
Warning! G
Refer to the description of the Brake
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
Assist System (BAS) ( page 76).
thereby significantly reducing their effec-
With the engine not running, there is no
tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
power assistance for the brake and steering
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci- If the parking brake is released and the
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
dent.
in mind that a considerably higher degree of brake warning lamp in the instrument clus-
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve- ter stays on and there is no audible warn-
hicle. ing (EBB), the brake fluid level in the
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly reservoir is too low.
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
Brakes
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
vehicle with considerable force prior to
be the reason for low brake fluid in the res-
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
ervoir.
the brakes.
Warning! G
Have the brake system inspected immedi-
If your brake system is normally only sub-
ately. Contact an authorized
After driving in heavy rain for some time
jected to moderate loads, you should occa-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
without applying the brakes or through wa-
sionally test the effectiveness of the
ter deep enough to wet brake components
All checks and service work on the brake
brakes by applying above-normal braking
or salty road conditions, the first braking ac-
system should be carried out by by quali-
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
tion may be somewhat reduced and in-
fied technicians only. Contact an autho-
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
creased pedal pressure may be necessary to
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a
Install only brake pads and brake fluid
safe distance from vehicles in front.
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
208
Operation
Driving instructions
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive Parking
Warning! G
on for some time, rather than immediately
parking, so the air stream will cool down
If other than recommended brake pads are
Warning! G
the brakes faster.
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
Driving off
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
leaves can come into contact with the hot
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
could result in an accident.
exhaust system, as these materials could be
driving off. Perform this procedure only
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
when the road is clear of other traffic.
! To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
place full load on the engine until the oper-
When driving down long and steep
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
ating temperature has been reached.
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
by selecting gear range 3, 2 or 1 on the
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
automatic transmission to use the en-
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an ex- Pull the parking brake lever up as many
gine s braking power ( page 142).
notches as possible.
tended period with the ESP switched off.
This helps prevent overheating of the
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
Move the selector lever to position P.
brakes and reduces brake pad wear.
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Slowly release brake pedal.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
When parked on an incline, turn front
To ensure sufficient traction during
wheel towards the road curb.
off-road driving, activate differential locks
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
as needed ( page 150).
position 0 and remove.
Take the SmartKey and lock vehicle
when leaving.
209
Operation
Driving instructions
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by Specified tire pressures must be main-
!
law. These indicators are located in six tained. This applies particularly if the tires
Set the parking brake whenever park-
places on the tread circumference and be- are subject to high loads (e.g. high speeds,
ing or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
come visible at a tread depth of approxi- heavy loads, high ambient temperatures).
move gear selector lever to position P.
mately 1D 16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the
In addition, when parking on hills, al-
tire is considered worn and should be re-
ways set the parking brake and turn
Warning! G
placed.
front wheel towards the road curb.
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
Tires band across the tread.
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
Warning! G
Warning! G speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Although the applicable federal motor vehi-
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
cle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
Hydroplaning
when the tread wear indicators (TWI) be-
ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
come visible at approximately 1D 16 in
you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
Depending on the depth of the water layer
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not al-
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
on the road, hydroplaning may occur even
low your tires to wear down to that level. As
tion to an area which is a safe distance from
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
tread depth approaches 1D 8 in (3.0 mm), the
the road.
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
adhesion properties on a wet road are
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
sharply reduced.
rain.
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
Depending upon the weather and/or road
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire
widely.
dealer for repairs.
210
Operation
Driving instructions
Tire traction Stopping distance, however, is still consid-
Warning! G
erably greater than when the road is not
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
covered with snow or ice. Exercise appro-
Even when permitted by law, never operate
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
priate caution.
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-
You should pay particular attention to the
!
mum speed rating of the tires.
condition of the road whenever the outside
Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
temperatures are close to the freezing
may cause serious damage to the
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail-
point.
drivetrain which is not covered by the
ure, causing loss of vehicle control and pos-
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
Warning! G
injury and possible death, for you and for
Tire speed rating
others.
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
Despite of the tire speed rating, local
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
speed limits should be obeyed. Use pru-
 V -rated tires, which have a speed rating
with extreme caution.
dent driving speeds appropriate to prevail-
of 149 mph (240 km/h).
ing conditions.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth
130 mph (210 km/h).
of approximately 1D 6 in (4 mm) for the win-
ter season for all four wheels to ensure
i
normal balanced handling characteristics.
For information on tire speed rating for
On packed snow, they can reduce your
winter tires, see  Winter tires
stopping distance as compared with sum-
( page 240).
mer tires.
211
Operation
Driving instructions
Winter driving instructions
Do not engage the transfer case in position
Warning! G
LOW when driving on ice or packed snow. At
The most important rule for slippery or icy
speeds below 18 mph (30 km/h) vehicle
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
steering is adversely affected by the LOW
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
RANGE  ABS ( page 75).
and from around the vehicle with the engine
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monox-
system under such conditions.
Road salts and chemicals can adversely af-
ide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior re-
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
sulting in unconsciousness and death.
move gear selector lever to position N. Try
force may become necessary to produce
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
to keep the vehicle under control by cor-
the normal brake effect.
open a window slightly on the side of the ve-
rective steering action.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
hicle not facing the wind.
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
i
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
For information on driving with snow
efficiency back to normal.
chains, see  Snow chains
Warning! G
( page 241).
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien-
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
cy should be tested as soon as possible af-
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In-
Warning! G
ter driving is resumed.
dicated temperatures just above the freez-
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift ing point do not guarantee that the road
Warning! G
in order to obtain braking action. This could surface is free of ice.
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
Make sure not to endanger any other road
cle control. Your vehicle s ABS will not pre-
For more information, see  Winter driving
users when carrying out these braking ma-
vent this type of control loss.
( page 240).
neuvers.
212
Operation
Driving instructions
Standing water Passenger compartment
Do not load items on the roof. It may cause
instability during some maneuvers which
!
could result in an accident. This vehicle is
Warning! G
Do not drive through flooded areas or
not intended to carry items on its roof. Thus
water of unknown depth. Before driving
roof rails and roof mounted ski or bike hold-
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
through water, determine its depth.
ers must not be used.
ly as possible.
Never accelerate before driving into
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
water. The bow wave could force water
Off-road driving
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
into the engine and auxiliary equip-
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
ment, thus damaging them.
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
Warning! G
If you must drive through standing wa-
securely fastened in the vehicle.
ter, drive slowly to prevent water from
Do not load items on the roof. It may cause
The rear cargo compartment is the preferred
entering the passenger compartment
instability during some maneuvers which
place to carry objects. Always use partition
or the engine compartment. Water in
could result in an accident.
net when transporting cargo. Partition net
these areas could cause damage to
cannot secure hard or heavy objects. Al-
electrical components or wiring of the
ways fasten items being carried as securely
engine or transmission, or could result
as possible using the cargo tie-down rings in
in water being ingested by the engine
the cargo compartment floor and fastening
through the air intake, causing severe
material.
internal engine damage. Any such dam-
age is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
213
Operation
Driving instructions
Special driving features for off-road
Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle.
Warning! G
driving
You may lose control of the vehicle if you
use only the service brake. The following driving features are available
Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This will
for specific kind of operation:
make it easier to recognize unexpected ob- Sand, dirt, mud and other material having
stacles and avoid damage to the vehicle. friction property can cause exceptional wear
ABS ( page 74)
and tear as well as brake failure.
To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never
ESP ( page 78)
turn it around on steep inclines. If the vehi- Have the brakes checked for dirt build-up
4-ETS ( page 77)
cle cannot complete the attempted climb, and cleaned. There is otherwise a risk that
back it down in reverse gear. full braking power may not be available in an Differential lock ( page 148)
emergency.
Do not drive along the side of a slope (dan-
Transfer case ( page 145)
ger of vehicle rollover). If in doing so the ve-
Read this chapter carefully before you be-
hicle begins to show a tendency to roll,
Off-road driving rules
gin off-road travel.
immediately steer into a line of gravity
Engage the transfer case in position
(straight up or downhill).
Familiarize yourself with the vehicle char-
LOW before driving under off-road con-
acteristics and gear changing before you
ditions ( page 145).
attempt any difficult terrain off-road driv-
If necessary activate differential locks
ing. We recommend that you start out with
( page 150).
easy off-road travel.
The ABS, BAS and ESP are switched off
automatically when the differential
locks are activated.
Fasten items being carried as securely
as possible ( page 180).
214
Operation
Driving instructions
Checklist before off-road driving
i Avoid excessive engine
speeds  drive at moderate engine
Whenever driving in off-road mode, we
Engine oil level
speeds (max. 3000 rpm).
recommend:
Check the engine oil level
Before driving through water, deter-
Keeping doors, tailgate, windows
( page 229). The display ENGINE OIL
mine its depth.
and sliding/pop-up roof closed.
LEVEL - OK must appear in the multi-
Do not stop vehicle while immersed
Switching cruise control off.
function display.
in water, and do not shut off the en-
Only then can the vehicle obtain a trou-
gine.
!
ble-free oil supply, even on steep gradi-
In sandy soil, drive at a steady
Observe the following during off-road
ents.
speed as allowed by conditions.
driving:
This helps overcome the vehicle
Tires
Adjust vehicle speed to condition of
rolling resistance and reduces the
terrain. The more uneven, rutty and
Check the tread depth and maintain
likelihood of the vehicle sinking into
steeper the terrain, the lower the
specified tire pressure (see tire pres-
the ground.
speed should be. Drive through wa-
sure label inside the fuel filler flap).
Do not initiate jumps with the vehi-
ter slowly at an even speed, avoid-
Check tires for possible damage and
cle. It interrupts the forward mo-
ing a bow wave.
remove foreign objects.
mentum of the vehicle.
Be especially careful when driving
Replace missing valve caps.
Always drive on slopes with the en-
in unknown territory. It may be nec-
gine running and the vehicle in
essary to get out of the vehicle and
gear.
scout the path you intend to take.
Inspect the vehicle for possible
Watch out for obstacles, such as
damage after each off-road trip.
rocks, holes, tree stumps and ruts.
215
Operation
Driving instructions
Rims Driving in steep terrain Drive slowly.
Dented or bent rims can cause tire Utilize the engine s braking power
pressure loss and damage the tire when descending a slope, observe the
beads. For this reason, check and, if engine speed (do not overrev the en-
necessary, change rims before driving gine). Apply the service brake as need-
off-road. ed.
Check the brakes after a lengthy down-
Vehicle tool kit
grade drive.
Check if the vehicle jack is functional.
Traction in steep terrain
In all cases take the vehicle tool kit, a
Slope angle
strong tow rope, a shovel and a small Be easy on the accelerator and watch for
plank (to put under the vehicle jack on continuous wheel traction when driving in
1 27�
sandy soil) with you. steep terrain.
2 36�
Comply with the warnings
i
( page 214) and rules for off-road
The 4-ETS helps greatly when starting
driving ( page 214).
out on a steep incline when the front
Driving on embankments, slopes and wheels have then the tendency to slip
other steep inclines should only be due to the weight shifting away the
done straight up or downhill, i.e. in the front axle.The 4-ETS recognizes the sit-
line of gravity. Maximum vehicle climb- uation and limits the torque for the
ing ability is a 80% grade. front wheels by braking them. Simulta-
neously the torque for the rear wheels
Select gear range 2 or 1 on the auto-
is provided.
matic transmission ( page 142).
216
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving across a hilltop Driving downhill Driving through water
Decelerate just ahead of a hilltop (do not Select gear range 1 on the automatic
select gear range N), to prevent the vehi- transmission ( page 142).
cle from speeding up too much after climb-
Drive downhill observing the same
ing a hill.
rules as driving uphill ( page 216).
Use the momentum of the vehicle to drive
!
across the hilltop.
Only apply the service brake if the vehi-
After climbing a hill, driving in this manner
cle is traveling straight downhill, i.e. in
prevents the vehicle from:
the line of gravity.
jumping across the hilltop
1 19 in (48 cm)
loosing its forward momentum i
Before driving through water, deter-
The special LOW RANGE  ABS setting
speeding up too much after climbing mine its depth.
allows for precise and brief (cyclical)
the hill
It should not be deeper than approxi-
blocking of the front wheels, permitting
mately 19 in (48 cm).
them to dig into loose ground.
Make sure you check the water bed.
Remember that, when stopped, the
The ground surface may not be firm
front wheels slide across a surface and
which may result in deeper waters than
thus lose their ability to steer the vehi-
expected when driving the vehicle
cle.
through it.
217
Operation
Driving instructions
Comply with the warnings Clean mud off the tire tread after driv-
!
( page 214) and rules for off-road ing through water.
If possible, use the assistance of a sec-
driving ( page 214).
ond person outside the vehicle to scout
To dry the brakes, apply pressure to the
the path you intend to take and check
Switch off the exterior lamps as well as brake pedal several times after leaving
for adequate ground clearance when
the climate control. the water.
you cross obstacles with your vehicle.
Select gear range 2 or 1 on the auto-
The person assisting you outside the
Crossing obstacles
matic transmission ( page 142).
vehicle should always be a safe dis-
Enter the water only at a shallow spot,
tance away from the vehicle and posi-
driving at walking speed.
tioned so that he or she cannot get hurt
in case of any unexpected vehicle
!
movement.
Never accelerate before driving into
After off-road driving or crossing obsta-
the water. The bow wave could force
cles, inspect vehicle for any damage,
water into the engine and auxiliary
especially vehicle undercarriage and
equipment, thus damaging them.
suspension components. Failure to do
so can adversely affect the vehicle s fu-
Do not stop vehicle while immersed in
ture performance, including increased
water, and do not shut off the engine.
chance of an accident.
There is a very high level of driving re-
sistance in water. The surface is slip-
pery and may not be firm, making
pulling away in water difficult and dan-
gerous.
218
Operation
Driving instructions
Check the vehicle clearance before Ruts Check the vehicle clearance before
crossing obstacles. driving in ruts.
!
Comply with the warnings Comply with the warnings
A number of off-road tracks or other by-
( page 214) and rules for off-road ( page 214) and rules for off-road
roads have deep ruts. If the vehicle
driving ( page 214). driving ( page 214).
does not have enough ground clear-
Select gear range 1 on the automatic ance: Select gear range 1 on the automatic
transmission ( page 142). transmission ( page 142).
it could be damaged
Cross obstacles (e.g. tree stumps or Drive slowly next to the ruts rather than
the underside of the vehicle may
big rocks) very slowly by aiming one of through them if at all possible.
come down on a surface and re-
the front wheels at the center of the ob-
main stuck
stacle, and repeat same with the rear
After off-road driving or crossing obsta-
wheel.
cles, inspect vehicle for any damage,
!
especially vehicle undercarriage and
Special attention is needed when you suspension components. Failure to do
cross obstacles on a steep incline. so can adversely affect the vehicle s fu-
ture performance, including increased
The vehicle could slide sideways as a
chance of an accident.
result of its possible slanted position
which in turn may result in the vehicle
tipping or rolling over.
219
Operation
Driving instructions
Returning from off-road driving Off-road driving increases strain on the ve- Remove excessive dirt from tires,
hicle. wheels, wheel housings, and under-
body.
We recommend that you inspect the vehi-
Warning! G
cle for possible damage after each off-road For instance, after driving in mud, clean
Never drive on pavement with activated dif- trip. Recognizing any damage and a subse- the radiator, chassis, engine, brakes,
ferential locks. Engaged front axle differen- quent timely repair reduces the chance of and wheels from extreme dirt using a
tial locks limits ability to move around
a possible breakdown or accident later on. strong jet of water.
curves.
Proceed as follows: Inspect frame, oil pan, brake hoses,
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
etc., as well as vehicle underbody for
Switch the transfer case in position
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
possible damage.
HIGH ( page 145).
ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
Check tires for possible damage and
you should turn on the hazard warning flash- Disengage differential locks
remove foreign objects. Clean all exte-
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau- ( page 151).
rior lamps and conduct a brake test.
tion to an area which is a safe distance from
the roadway.
Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for
possible damage. If the vehicle or tires ap-
pear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire
dealer for repairs.
Damage to the vehicle negatively influences
driving comfort and poses the risk of acci-
dent to you and other drivers.
220
Operation
Driving instructions
Clean all exterior lamps and check Control and operation of radio trans- Telephones and two-way radios
them for possible damage. mitters
Check for brush or branches caught in
Warning! G
the undercarriage.
COMAND, radio and telephone*
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
They could increase the possibility of a
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
fire, as well as cut fuel and/or brake
Warning! G
out being connected to an external antenna)
lines, puncture rubber bellows of the
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
axles or drive shafts. Do not forget that your primary responsibili-
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
ty is to drive the vehicle safely. Only operate
After continued operation in mud,
tion of the vehicle s electronic system, pos-
the COMAND, radio or telephone1 if road,
sand, water or other dirty conditions,
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
traffic and weather conditions permit.
clean the brake discs, wheels, brake
personal injury.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
pads and check and clean axle joints.
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Conduct a brake test. Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
covering a distance of approximately
phone or citizens band unit should only be
50 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
used inside the vehicle if they are connect-
1
Observe all legal requirements. ed to an antenna that is installed on the
outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation in-
structions regarding use of an external an-
tenna.
221
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving abroad Catalytic converter
Warning! G
Abroad, there is a widely-spread Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op-
Mercedes-Benz service network at your monolithic-type catalytic converters, an
erate this vehicle in areas where combusti-
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas important element in conjunction with the
ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves
which are not listed in the index of your oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con-
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center directo- trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis-
system, as these materials could be ignited
ry, you should request pertinent informa- sions. Keep your vehicle in proper
and cause a vehicle fire.
tion from your authorized Mercedes-Benz operating condition by following our rec-
Light Truck Center. ommended maintenance instructions as
outlined in your Service Booklet.
Emission control
!
Certain engine systems serve to keep the
To prevent damage to the catalytic con-
toxic components of the exhaust gases
verters, use only premium unleaded
within permissible legal limits.
gasoline in this vehicle.
These systems, of course, will function
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
properly only when maintained strictly ac-
operation should be repaired promptly.
cording to factory specifications. Any ad-
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
justments on the engine should, therefore,
may reach the catalytic converter,
be carried out only by qualified
causing it to overheat and start a fire.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center autho-
rized technicians. Engine adjustments
should not be altered in any way. More-
over, the specified service jobs must be
222
Operation
Driving instructions
carried out regularly according to Coolant temperature
Warning! G
Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements.
During severe operating conditions and
For details refer to the Service Booklet.
Driving when your engine is badly over-
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
heated can cause some fluids which
perature may rise to approx. 248�F
Warning! G
may have leaked into the engine com-
(120�C).
partment to catch fire. You could be se-
The engine should not be operated with
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
riously burned.
the coolant temperature above 248�F
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
Steam from an overheated engine can
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon- (120�C). Doing so may cause serious en-
cause serious burns and can occur just
gine damage which is not covered by the
sciousness and lead to death.
by opening the hood. Stay away from
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
the engine if you see or hear steam com-
Do not run the engine in confined areas
ing from it.
(such as a garage) which are not properly
i
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
Excessive coolant temperatures trigger
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
a warning message in the multifunction
engine has cooled down.
have the cause determined and corrected
display ( page 269).
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one win-
dow fully open at all times.
223
Operation
At the gas station
At the gas station
Refueling
Warning! G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres-
Warning! G
sure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
back out when removing the fuel pump noz-
It burns violently and can cause serious inju-
zle, which could cause personal injury.
ry. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the
flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
Turn off the engine.
right.
Failure to remove the fuel cap slowly could
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
You should hear the fuel filler cap en-
result in personal injury.
switch.
gage.
Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
Close the fuel filler flap.
The fuel filler flap is located on the
the point indicated by the arrow.
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
!
Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel
to it until possible pressure is released.
the remote control automatically
filler neck. Do not drop the cap. It could
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
Take off the cap and set it in the recess
damage the vehicle paint finish.
on the fuel filler flap.
When refueling the vehicle, make cer-
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
tain that no gasoline comes into con-
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
tact with plastic tail lamp to prevent
unit.
damaging the lens.
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out  do not top up or overfill.
224
Operation
At the gas station
Check regularly and before a long trip Brake fluid
i
Use only premium unleaded gasoline
!
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
If you find that the brake fluid in the
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
Information on gasoline quality can
minimum mark or below, have the
normally be found on the fuel pump.
brake system checked for brake pad
More information on gasoline can be
thickness and leaks immediately. Noti-
found in the Factory Approved Service
fy an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Products pamphlet.
Truck Center immediately. Do not add
brake fluid as this will not solve the
problem. For more information, see
i
1 Coolant
 Practical hints ( page 254) .
Leaving the engine running and the fuel
2 Brake fluid
cap open can cause the ? malfunc-
Windshield/rear window washer sys-
tion indicator lamp to illuminate.
i
tem and headlamp cleaning system
Opening the hood, see ( page 227).
See also  Practical hints section
For more information on refilling the reser-
( page 256).
voir, see  Windshield/rear window washer
Coolant
system and headlamp cleaning system
For normal replenishing, use water (pota-
( page 234).
ble water quality). For more information,
see  Coolant level ( page 232) and see
 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
( page 333).
225
Operation
At the gas station
Engine oil level
For more information on engine oil, see
( page 228).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. For infor-
mation on replacing light bulbs, see  Re-
placing bulbs ( page 295).
For more information, see  Exterior lamp
switch ( page 104).
Tire inflation pressure
For more information, see  Checking tire
inflation pressure ( page 237).
226
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Hood Pull release lever 1 upward.
Warning! G
The hood is unlocked.
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
Warning! G
!
moving parts when the hood is open and the
To avoid damage to the windshield wip-
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi-
ers or hood, open the hood only with
properly closed before driving. When closing
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
wipers in parked position.
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
be forced open by passing air flow.
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for ap-
Opening
proximately 30 seconds or even restart af-
The pull release lever is under the driver s
ter the engine has been turned off. Stay
side of the instrument panel.
clear of fan blades.
Warning! G
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem-
2 Safety hook
perature display indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
Lift hood up slightly.
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
Pull safety hook 2 in direction of ar-
until the engine has cooled down. If neces-
row and open hood.
1 Release lever
sary, call the fire department.
227
Operation
Engine compartment
Closing Engine oil
Warning! G
The amount of oil your engine needs will
Warning! G
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
depend on a number of factors, including
ignition system. Because of the high voltage,
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
it is dangerous to touch any components (ig-
occur when
anyone.
nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
the vehicle is new
socket) of the ignition system
Lower hood and let it drop into lock
the vehicle is driven frequently at
with the engine running
from a height of approximately 0.7 ft
higher engine speeds
while starting the engine
(20 cm).
Engine oil consumption checks should only
if ignition is  on and the engine is
The hood will lock audibly.
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
turned manually
Check to make sure the hood is fully
i
closed.
Do not use any special lubricant addi-
If you can raise the hood at a point
tives, as these may damage the drive
above the headlamps, then it is not
assemblies. Using special additives not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
approved by Mercedes-Benz will
drop with somewhat greater force.
restrict your warranty entitlement.
More information on this subject is
!
available at any Mercedes-Benz Light
Do not push the hood closed manually,
Truck Center.
as this could damage it.
228
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level with the ENGINE OIL LEVEL
i
control system MEASURING NOW
If you want to interrupt the checking
procedure, press the k or j
When checking the oil level the vehicle
button on the multifunction steering
must
wheel.
be parked on level ground
be at normal operating temperature
If necessary, add engine oil.
have been stationary for at least five
For adding engine oil see ( page 231).
One of the following messages will
minutes with the engine turned off
For more information on engine oil, see the
subsequently appear in the indicator:
To check the engine oil level via the
 Technical data section ( page 333) and
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
multifunction display, do the following:
( page 334).
OK
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
ADD 1.0 Qt. TO Other display messages
to position 2.
REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL!
If the SmartKey is not turned to position 2
The standard display ( page 115) should
(Canada: 1.0 LITER) in the starter switch, the following
appear in the multifunction display.
message will appear:
ADD 1.5 Qts. TO
Press button k or j on the
REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL! FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL
steering wheel until the following
SWITCH ON IGNITION!
message is seen in the multifunction
(Canada: 1.5 LITERS)
display:
Switch on the ignition.
ADD 2.0 Qts. TO
MEASURE. CORRECT
REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL! If you see the message:
ONLY IF VEH. LEVEL
(Canada: 2.0 LITERS) OBSERVE WAITING PERIOD
After about three seconds this
message is displayed:
229
Operation
Engine compartment
If engine is at normal operating Have excess oil siphoned or drained Checking engine oil level with the oil
temperature, wait five minutes before off. Contact your authorized dipstick
repeating check procedure. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
When checking the oil level the vehicle
If engine is not yet at normal operating must
!
temperature, wait 30 minutes before
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained be parked on level ground
repeating check procedure.
off. It could cause damage to the
be at normal operating temperature
If you see the message: engine and catalytic converter not
have been stationary for at least five
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
minutes with the engine turned off
Warranty.
NOT WHEN ENGINE ON!
i
Turn off the engine.
i
The engine oil level can be checked by
If the engine is at normal operating
Perform the engine oil level check with
either the oil dipstick or via the multi-
temperature, wait five minutes before
the dipstick if it cannot be completed
function display in the instrument
checking oil.
with the control system ( page 230).
cluster ( page 229). The amount of
If the engine is not yet at normal
engine oil needed is shown more
In this case we recommend that you
operating temperature, you must wait
precisely in the multifunction display.
have the system checked at a
30 minutes before checking oil.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
If there is excess engine oil with the engine
at normal operating temperature, the For more information on messages in the
following message will appear: display concerning engine oil, see the
 Practical hints section ( page 271).
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
REDUCE OIL LEVEL
230
Operation
Engine compartment
To check the engine oil level with the oil Adding engine oil
i
dipstick, do the following:
The filling quantity between the upper
!
and lower marks on the oil dipstick is
Open the hood ( page 227).
Only use approved engine oils. For a
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
Pull out oil dipstick 1 ( page 232) listing of approved engine oils, refer to
the Factory Approved Service Products
Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
If necessary, add engine oil.
pamphlet in your vehicle literature port-
Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the
For adding engine oil see ( page 231). folio.
dipstick guide tube.
For more information on engine oil, see the In addition, check the oil filler cap for
Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after
 Technical data section ( page 333) and important information pertaining to the
approximately three seconds to obtain
( page 334). engine oil needing to meet a specific
accurate reading.
Mercedes-Benz specification (e.g. MB
For more information on messages in the
229.5). If such information is printed
display concerning engine oil, see the
on the oil filler cap, only use an engine
 Practical hints section ( page 271).
oil from the list of approved engine oils
in the Factory Approved Service Prod-
ucts pamphlet that meets the specifi-
cation indicated on the oil filler cap.
Using engine oils of other specification
may cause the FSS to incorrectly deter-
mine the next service interval and will
result in engine damage not covered by
Oil dipstick
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The oil level is correct when it is between
the lower (min) and upper (max) mark of
the oil dipstick.
231
Operation
Engine compartment
Transmission fluid level
!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
The transmission fluid level does not need
off. It could cause damage to the
to be checked. The transmission has a per-
engine and catalytic converter not
manent supply of automatic transmission
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
fluid.
Warranty.
If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear
shifting malfunctions, have an authorized
Screw oil filler cap 2 back on filler
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center check
neck.
the automatic transmission.
For more information on engine oil, see the
1 Oil dipstick
 Technical data section ( page 333) and
2 Oil filler cap
Coolant level
( page 334).
Unscrew oil filler cap 2 from filler
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
neck.
and anticorrosion/antifreeze.
Add engine oil as required. Be careful
When checking the coolant level,
not to overfill with oil.
the vehicle must be parked on level
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
ground.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
the engine must be cool. The coolant
level should reach the COLD LEVEL
mark in the reservoir.
232
Operation
Engine compartment
The coolant expansion tank is located on Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approx-
Warning! G
the passenger side of the engine compart- imately one half turn to the left to re-
ment. lease any excess pressure.
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
Continue turning the cap to the left and
Use extreme caution when opening the
remove it.
hood if there are any signs of steam or
Check coolant level.
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature display in-
The coolant level is correct if the level
dicates that the coolant is overheated.
for cold coolant: is level with the
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
mark on the reservoir
reservoir if engine temperature is above
194�F (90�C). Allow engine to cool
for warm coolant: is approx. 0.6 in
down before removing cap. The coolant
(1.5 cm) higher
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under
1 Cap
Add coolant as required.
pressure.
Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx-
Replace and tighten cap until you hear
imately 1D 2 turn to relieve excess pres-
it click a few times.
sure. If opened immediately, scalding
For more information on coolant, see
hot fluid and steam will be blown out un-
 Coolants ( page 336).
der pressure.
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-
col which may burn if it comes into con-
tact with hot engine parts.
233
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield/rear window washer sys- Use the tab to pull cap 1 upwards.
Warning! G
tem and headlamp cleaning system
Check washer solvent level and add
washer solvent as required.
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flam-
The windshield washer reservoir is located
mable. Do not spill washer
in the engine compartment on the passen- Press cap 1 on the filler neck until is
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, be-
has completely engaged.
ger side. It holds approximately 5.3 US qt
cause it may ignite and burn. You could be
(5.0 l). The headlamp cleaning system is
Add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
seriously burned.
also supplied from the windshield washer
 S to the water during all seasons.
reservoir.
At temperatures above freezing point,
!
use MB Windshield Washer Concen-
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
trate  S to prevent smearing.
for plastic lenses. Improper washer flu-
If there is a danger of frost, use
id can damage the plastic lenses of the
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
headlamps.
 S and commercially available pre-
mixed windshield washer solvent/anti-
freeze to prevent water from freezing
on the windshield and the reservoir
from being damaged.
1 Cap
Premix the windshield washer fluid in a
suitable container, adapting the mixing ra-
tio to the outside temperature
( page 339).
234
Operation
Battery
Battery
The battery is located in front of the rear Batteries contain materials that can harm
Observe all safety instructions
seat bench and below the cup holder. Jump the environment if disposed of improperly.
Gand precautions when handling
starting terminals are located in the left Recycling of batteries is the preferred
automotive batteries.
side of the engine compartment method of disposal. Many states require
Risk of explosion
( page 314). Refer to Service Booklet for sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
A
battery maintenance intervals. for recycling.
The battery should always be sufficiently Keep flames or sparks away
i
charged in order to achieve its rated ser- D from battery. Do not smoke.
If the battery is discharged
vice life.
you will no longer be able to turn
If you use your vehicle less than approxi-
Battery acid is caustic. Do not
the SmartKey in the starter switch
mately 200 miles (300 km) per month,
B allow it to come into contact
the gear selector lever will remain
mostly for short-distance trips, or if it is not
with skin, eyes or clothing.
locked in position P
used for long periods of time, you will need
In case it does, immediately
to have the battery charge checked more
flush affected area with clear
frequently and corrected if necessary.
For more information, see  Battery
water and seek medical help if
( page 311).
When replacing batteries, always use bat-
necessary.
teries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Wear eye protection.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
E
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Keep children away.
Center about steps you need to observe. C
Follow the instructions in this
F Operator s Manual.
235
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Important guidelines
Warning! G
Truck Center for information on tested and
Use only sets of tires and rims of the
recommended rims and tires for summer
Do not mix different tire construction types
same type and make.
and winter operation. They can also offer
(i.e. radial, bias, bias-belted) on your vehicle
advice concerning tire service and pur-
Tires must be of the correct size for the
because handling may be adversely affected
chase.
rim.
and may result in loss of control.
Break in new tires for approximately
Warning! G
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
Warning! G
Replace rims or tires with the same designa-
Regularly check the tires and rims for
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
damage. Dented or bent rims can
original part. See your authorized
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
cause tire pressure loss and damage to
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for fur-
sustained damage, replace them.
the tire beads.
ther information. If incorrectly sized rims
When replacing rims, use only genuine
and tires are mounted:
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
pressure and correct as required.
The wheel brakes or suspension compo-
particular rim type. Failure to do so can re-
nents can be damaged.
Do not allow your tires to wear down
sult in the bolts loosening and possibly an
The correct operating clearance of the
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
accident.
wheels and the tires are no longer guar-
roads are sharply reduced at tread
anteed.
depths under 1D 8 in (3 mm).
Retreaded tires are not tested or recom-
When replacing individual tires, you
mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
should mount new tires on the front
damage cannot always be recognized on
wheels first (on vehicles with
retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore
same-sized wheels all around).
not assure the operating safety of the vehi-
cle when such tires are used.
236
Operation
Tires and wheels
Life of tire Direction of rotation Checking tire inflation pressure
The service life of a tire is dependent upon Unidirectional tires offer added advantag-
varying factors including but not limited to: es, such as better hydroplaning perfor- Warning! G
mance. To benefit, however, you must
Driving style
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly:
ensure the tires rotate in the direction
Tire pressure
specified.
Check the tires for punctures from for-
eign objects.
Distance driven
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the in-
tended direction of rotation of the tire. Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.
Warning! G
Tires and spare wheel should be replaced af-
Correct the tire pressure only when tires
ter six years, regardless of the remaining
are cold.
tread.
Regularly check your tire pressure at inter-
vals of no more than 14 days.
!
If the tires are warm, you should only cor-
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
rect the tire pressure if it is too low for cur-
place with as little exposure to light as
rent operating conditions.
possible. Protect tires from contact
A table on the fuel filler flap lists the spec-
with oil, grease and gasoline.
ified tire inflation pressures for warm and
cold tires as well as for various operating
conditions.
237
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rotating wheels
i
Warning! G
The pressures listed for light loads are
minimum values offering high driving
Follow recommended inflation pressures.
Warning! G
comfort.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
Increased inflation pressures listed for
Rotate front and rear wheels only if there are
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
heavier loads may also be used for light
of the same size.
cause they are more likely to become punc-
loads. These higher pressures produce
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
favorable handling characteristics. The
etc. The wheels can be rotated every 3000 to
ride of the vehicle, however, will be
6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km) or soon-
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
somewhat harder. Never exceed the
er if necessary, according to the degree of
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
max. values or inflate tires below the
tire wear. The same direction of tire rota-
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
min. values listed in the fuel filler flap.
tion must be retained.
from being overheated.
Rotate the wheels before the characteris-
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
Tire pressure changes by approximately
tic tire wear pattern becomes visible
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18�F (10�C) of air
(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) as in-
temperature change. Keep this in mind
center wear on rear wheels).
dicated on the certification label on the driv-
when checking tire pressure where the
er s door pillar. Overloading the tires can
temperature is different from the outside
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
temperature.
wheels after each rotation. Check and en-
sure proper tire inflation pressure.
Tire temperature and tire pressure are also
Check the spare tire periodically for condi-
increased while driving, depending on the
tion and inflation. Spare tire will age and
driving speed and the tire load.
become worn over time even if never used,
and thus should be inspected and replaced
when necessary.
238
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning! G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
97 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle s rims.
239
Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your vehi- Winter tires tices are available at your tire dealer or any
cle winterized at an authorized authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Always use winter tires at temperatures
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. This Center.
below 45�F (7�C) and whenever wintry
service includes:
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
Warning! G
is the only way to achieve the maximum ef-
concentration.
fectiveness of the ABS, ESP, EBB and
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
4-ETS in winter operation.
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
water of the windshield and headlamp
For safe handling, make sure all winter
the difference in tire characteristics may
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
tires mounted are of the same make and
very well impair turning stability and that
 S to a premixed windshield washer
have the same tread design.
overall driving stability may be reduced.
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
for below freezing point temperatures
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
Warning! G
( page 339).
tire at the nearest authorized
Battery test. Battery capacity drops
Winter tires with a tread depth under 1D 6 in Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
with decreasing ambient temperature.
(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no long-
A well charged battery helps to ensure
er suitable for winter operation.
Block heater (Canada only)
the engine can be started even at low
ambient temperatures.
The engine is equipped with a block heat-
Always observe the speed rating of the
Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recom-
er.
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
mend M+S rated radial-ply tires with a
maximum speed for which your tires are
The electrical cable may be installed at
minimum tread depth of approximately
rated is below the speed rating of your ve-
1 your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
D 6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
hicle, you must place a notice to this effect
winter season.
where it will be seen by the driver. Such no-
240
Operation
Winter driving
Snow chains Observe the following guidelines when us-
ing snow chains:
Snow chains should only be driven on
Use of snow chains is not permissible
snow-covered roads at speeds not to ex-
on all wheel/tire combinations.
ceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
Snow chains should only be used on all
as soon as possible when driving on roads
four wheels. With only two chains avail-
without snow.
able, they should be mounted on the
i
rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer s
When driving with snow chains, you mounting instructions.
may wish to deactivate the ESP
Only use snow chains that are ap-
( page 79) before setting the vehicle
proved by Mercedes-Benz. Your autho-
in motion. This will improve the
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
vehicle s traction.
Center will be glad to advise you on this
subject.
Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
241
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have after 10 seconds when you switch on
your vehicle serviced by your authorized the ignition or when reaching the ser-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, in ac- vice threshold while driving
cordance with the Service Booklet at the
after 30 seconds, once the suggested
times called for by the FSS (Flexible Ser-
service term has passed
vice System).
You can also clear it yourself.
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
The type of service due is indicated in the
Press the reset button on the instru-
accordance with the Service Booklet at the
speedometer display field:
ment cluster ( page 25).
designated times/mileage called for by
9 Minor service (A)
the FSS may result in vehicle damage not
Service term exceeded
� Major service (B)
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i
If you have exceeded the suggested ser-
FSS will notify you when your next service
vice term, you will see the following mes-
The interval between services depends
is due.
sage in the multifunction display:
on your driving habits. A gentle driving
Approximately one month before your next style, moderate engine speeds and the
SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XX DAYS
service is due, one of the following mes- avoidance of short-distance trips will
SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XX MILES (KM)
sages will appear in the multifunction dis- lengthen the interval between services.
An accoustic signal will sound.
play while you are driving or when you
switch on the ignition (example service A):
Clearing the service indicator The Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will
reset the service indicator following a com-
SERVICE A IN XX DAYS
The service indicator is automatically
pleted service.
SERVICE A IN XX MILES (KM)
cleared
SERVICE A DUE NOW!
242
Operation
Maintenance
Calling up the service indicator Resetting the service indicator
i
If the service indicator was inadvertent-
Switch ignition on. In the event that the service on your vehi-
ly reset, have a Mercedes-Benz Light
cle is not carried out by an authorized
The standard display of the control sys- Truck Center correct it.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, you
tem appears ( page 115).
Only reset if the proper service has
can reset the service indicator yourself.
Press button k or j on the mul- been performed. Resetting the system
Switch ignition on.
tifunction steering wheel until the FSS without performing proper service as
indicator appears in the multifunction The standard display of the control sys- called for by the FSS will cause the FSS
display. tem appears ( page 115). to incorrectly determine the next ser-
vice interval which will result in engine
Press button k or j on the mul-
i
damage not covered by the Mer-
tifunction steering wheel until the FSS
If the vehicle battery is disconnected,
cedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
indicator appears in the multifunction
the days of disconnection will not be in-
display.
cluded in the count shown by the ser-
Press the reset button ( page 25) for
vice indicator. To arrive at the true
service deadline, you will need to sub- about three seconds.
tract these days from the days shown
This message appears in the tachome-
in the service indicator.
ter:
Do not confuse the service indicator
SERVICE INTERVAL?
with the engine oil level indicator :.
RESET WITH R BUTTON FOR 3 SEC.
To confirm, press reset button until you
hear a signal.
The service indicator now displays the
reset interval.
243
Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle Such damage is caused not only by ex- More frequent washings are necessary to
treme and varying climatic conditions, but deal with unfavorable conditions:
also by:
Near the ocean
Warning! G
Air pollution
In industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Road salt emissions)
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Tar During winter operation
Always follow the instructions on the partic-
Gravel and stone chipping You should check your vehicle from time to
ular container. Always open your vehicle s
time for stone chipping or other damage.
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
To avoid paint damage, you should imme-
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de- diately remove:
possible to prevent corrosion.
signed for cleaning your vehicle.
Grease and oil
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
Fuel
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
While in operation, even while parked, your
ough check is a washing of the underbody
Coolant
vehicle is subjected to varying external in-
followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
fluences which, if gone unchecked, can at-
Brake fluid
aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
tack the paintwork as well as the
Bird droppings
underbody and cause lasting damage. Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-
ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
Insects
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
Tree resins, etc.
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi- neither necessary nor recommended by
nates the aggressiveness and potency of
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
the above adverse influences.
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others ap-
plied later.
244
Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and Power-washer Paintwork, painted body components
compiled recommendations which are
When using a power-washer for cleaning Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
specially matched to our vehicles and
the vehicle, always observe manufactur- should be applied when water drops on the
which always reflect the latest technology.
er s operating instructions. paint surface do not  bead up , normally
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
every three to five months, depending on
car-care products at your authorized
!
climate and washing detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Never use a round nozzle to pow-
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
er-wash tires. The intense jet of water
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
should be applied if the paint surface
can result in damage to the tire.
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
shows signs of dirt embedding (i.e. loss of
cannot always be removed or repaired with
Always replace a damaged tire.
gloss).
the car-care products recommended here.
Always keep the jet of water moving
Do not apply any of these products or wax
In such cases it is best to seek aid at your
across the surface. Do not aim directly
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
at electrical parts, electrical connec-
hood is still hot.
Center.
tors, sensors, seals, or other rubber
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up
The following topics deal with the cleaning
parts.
Stick for quick and provisional repairs
and care of your vehicle and give important
of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from
 how-to information as well as references
Tar stains
stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care prod-
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
ucts.
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
Additional information can be found in the
remover is recommended.
booklet  Vehicle Care Guide .
245
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning Vehicle washing Ornamental moldings
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment, Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
make sure to protect electrical compo- in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash chrome-plated parts, use a chrome clean-
nents and connectors from the intrusion of detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz ap- er.
water and cleaning agents. proved Car Shampoo.
Headlamps, tail lamps, side marker,
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor- Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
turn signal lenses
rosion Wax should be applied to the engine fused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
compartment after every engine cleaning. spray towards the ventilation intake. Use Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Before applying, all control linkage bush- plenty of water and rinse the sponge and Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
ings and joints should be lubricated. The chamois frequently. poo, with plenty of water.
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be pro-
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry To prevent scratches, never apply strong
tected from any wax.
with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
agents to dry on the finish. cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not at-
tempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in ex-
or sponge.
terior rear view mirrors prior to running the
vehicle through an automatic car wash to
prevent damage to the mirrors.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the underbody, do not for-
get to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
246
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Rear Parking Assist Wiper blades Window cleaning
sensors*
Fold wiper arms forward. Fold wiper arms forward.
Warning! G Warning! G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re- For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
move SmartKey from starter switch before move SmartKey from starter switch before
cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise the cleaning the windshield, otherwise the wiper
wiper motor can suddenly turn on and cause motor can suddenly turn on and cause inju-
injury. ry.
1 Sensor Clean the wiper blade inserts with a Use a window cleaning solution on all
clean cloth and detergent solution. glass surfaces.
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham- An automotive glass cleaner is recom-
!
poo, with plenty of water to clean mended.
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
sensor 1.
onto the windshield before turning the
!
To prevent scratches, never apply strong SmartKey in the starter switch.
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
Hold on to the wiper when folding the onto the windshield before turning the
cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not at-
wiper arm back. If released, the force SmartKey in the starter switch.
tempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth
of the impact from the tensioning
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
or sponge.
spring could crack the windshield.
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
247
Operation
Vehicle care
Light alloy wheels Instrument cluster Hard plastic trim items
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
should be used for regular cleaning of the mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
light alloy wheels. washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist- with light pressure.
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
scouring agents. Headliner
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, us-
ing a soft bristle brush and a strong spray Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
of water. dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly dirt.
Follow instructions on container.
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care. Seat belts
i
Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
The webbing must not be treated with
Cup holder
The acid could lead to corrosion or may
chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear,
damage the clear coat.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a webbing at temperatures above 176�F
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist- (80�C) or in direct sunlight.
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Warning! G
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
248
Operation
Vehicle care
Upholstery Cloth upholstery Illuminated door sill panels
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
clothing that have the tendency to give off dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause dirt. washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-
the upholstery to become permanently dis- ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
colored. By lining the seats with a proper MB Tex upholstery scouring agents.
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
will be prevented. Wood trims
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure. Dampen cloth using water and use damp
Leather upholstery
cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth Plastic and rubber parts Do not use solvents like tar remover or
and dry thoroughly or clean with wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care. these may be abrasive.
Exercise particular care when cleaning per-
forated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
249
250
Practical hints
What to do if &
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Brush guard*
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
251
Practical hints
What to do if &
What to do if &
Lamps in instrument cluster General information:
turning the SmartKey in starter switch to
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to
position 2, have it checked and replaced if
come on during the bulb self-check when
necessary.
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
- The yellow ABS indicator lamp You engaged the differential locks. The ABS, The driving systems will switch on
comes on while driving. ESP, BAS, EBB and 4-ETS are switched off. again after the differential locks have
been disengaged.
The ABS has detected a malfunction and has Continue driving with added caution.
switched off. The ESP, BAS, EBB and 4-ETS Wheels will lock during hard braking
are also switched off (see messages in dis- reducing steering capability.
play).
Have the system checked at an autho-
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, oth- rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
er systems such as the navigation system or ter as soon as possible.
Rear Parking Assist* may also malfunction.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
The brake system is still functioning normally creases the risk of an accident.
but without the ABS available.
252
Practical hints
What to do if &
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
- The yellow ABS indicator lamp The ABS has switched off because charging Turn off unnecessary electric con-
comes on while driving. voltage has fallen below 10 volts. The battery sumers.
may not be charged.
When the battery voltage is above this
value again, the ABS is operational
again.
Note the messages in the multifunc-
tion display ( page 260).
253
Practical hints
What to do if &
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
; (USA only)
3 (Canada only)
The red brake warning lamp You are driving with the parking brake set. Release the parking brake
comes on while driving and you ( page 44).
hear a warning sound.
Also note the messages in the multi-
function display ( page 260).
The red brake warning lamp There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
comes on while driving. voir. vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not
solve the problem.
Also note the messages in the multi-
function display ( page 260).
!
Do not add brake fluid before checking the
Warning! G
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid res-
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
ervoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi-
minimum mark or below, have the
engine parts and the brake fluid catching
nated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked for brake pad
fire. You could be seriously burned.
brake system checked immediately if the
thickness and leaks.
brake warning lap stays on.
254
Practical hints
What to do if &
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
; (USA only) The EBB has detected a malfunction and has Continue driving with added caution.
switched off. You should be prepared for your
3 (Canada only) Have the system checked at an autho-
vehicle to perform differently than normal
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
- The red brake warning lamp and
when braking.
ter as soon as possible.
the yellow ABS indicator lamp
come on when the engine is run- Also note the messages in the multi-
ning and you hear a warning function display ( page 260).
sound for approximately five sec-
Failure to follow these instructions in-
onds.
creases the risk of accidents.
255
Practical hints
What to do if &
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
? The yellow  CHECK ENGINE There is a malfunction of: Have the vehicle checked as soon as
malfunction indicator lamp possible by an authorized
The fuel management system
comes on while driving. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
The ignition system
An on-board diagnostic connector is
used by the service station to link the
The emission control system
vehicle to the shop diagnostics sys-
Systems which impact emissions
tem. It allows the accurate identifica-
tion of system malfunctions through
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
the readout of diagnostic trouble
emissions values and may switch the engine
codes. It is located near the hood lock
to its limp-home (emergency operation)
release on the upper left of footwell.
mode. Serious damage can occur to the
emission system.
The fuel cap is not closed tightly. Check the fuel cap.
Your gas tank is empty. After refuelling, start the engine three
or four times in succession. The
limp-home mode is canceled.
256
Practical hints
What to do if &
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
v The yellow ESP warning lamp You engaged the differential locks. The ABS, The driving systems will switch on
comes on and remains on while ESP, BAS, EBB and 4-ETS are switched off. again after the differential locks have
driving. been disengaged.
Also note the messages in the multi-
function display ( page 260).
The ESP is deactivated. Turn the ESP back on ( page 81).
Risk of accident! Adapt your speed and driv- If the ESP cannot be turned back on, have
ing to the prevailing road conditions. the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as
soon as possible.
The ESP is deactivated because of interrupt- Note the messages in the multifunc-
ed power supply. The ABS may still be opera- tion display ( page 260).
tional. The ESP has to be synchronized.
The ESP, ABS, BAS, EBB or 4-ETS has detect- Note the messages in the multifunc-
ed a malfunction. All driving systems are tion display ( page 260).
switched off.
Risk of accident! Adapt your speed and driv-
ing to the prevailing road conditions.
257
Practical hints
What to do if &
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
< The red seat belt non-usage The warning lamp reminds you to fasten seat Fasten your seat belt.
warning lamp illuminates briefly belts.
after starting the engine.
The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp The fuel level has gone below the reserve Refuel at the next gas station.
illuminates while driving. mark.
Also note the messages in the multi-
function display ( page 260).
The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp is The fuel cap is not closed tight. Check the fuel cap.
blinking.
1 The red SRS indicator lamp There is a malfunction in the restraint sys- Drive with added caution to the near-
comes on while driving. tems. The airbags or emergency tensioning est authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
device (ETD) could deploy unexpectedly or Truck Center.
fail to activate in an accident.
For your safety, we strongly recommend This could result in serious or fatal injury, or
Warning! G
that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz it might deploy unexpectedly and unneces-
Light Truck Center immediately to have the sarily which could also result in an accident
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-
system checked; otherwise the SRS may not and/or injury to you or to others.
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
be activated when needed in an accident.
operational.
258
Practical hints
What to do if &
Lamp in center console
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
7 The indicator lamp comes on. A BabySmartTM child seat is installed on the Have the system checked as soon as
front passenger seat. Therefore the passen- possible by an authorized
ger front airbag is switched off. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
The system is malfunctioning when there is
no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the
front passenger seat.
7 The indicator lamp does not The system is malfunctioning. Make sure there is nothing between
come on with a BabySmartTM1 seat cushion and child seat and check
child seat properly installed on installation of the child seat.
the front passenger seat.
If the light remains out, have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint
to transport children on the front pas-
senger seat until the system has been
repaired.
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
259
Practical hints
What to do if &
Messages in the multifunction display
i
Warning! G
Turning the SmartKey in starter switch
The control system shows warning and
to position 2 causes all lamps as well
All categories of messages contain impor-
malfunction messages in the multifunction
as the multifunction display to come
tant information which should be taken note
display.
on. Make sure they are all in working
of and, where a malfunction is indicated, ad-
Certain warning and malfunction messag- order before starting your journey.
dressed as soon as possible at an autho-
es are accompanied by an audible signal.
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
On the pages that follow, you will find a
Address these messages accordingly and
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
compilation of the most important warning
follow the additional instructions given in
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
and malfunction messages that may ap-
this Operator s Manual.
Limited Warranty, or result in property dam-
pear in the multifunction display. High-
Selecting the malfunction memory menu in age or personal injury.
priority messages appear on a red back-
the control system ( page 122) displays
ground.
both cleared and uncleared messages.
Warning! G
High-priority messages appear in the mul-
tifunction display in red colour.
No messages will be displayed if either the
Certain messages of high priority cannot
instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
be cleared from the multifunction display
play is inoperative. Systems that have a sig-
using the reset button ( page 112).
nificant influence on handling performance
may not be functioning.
Other high-priority messages and messag-
es of less immediate priority (regular dis-
Contact your nearest authorized
play colours) can be cleared from the
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
multifunction display using the reset but-
ton and are then stored in the malfunction
message memory ( page 122).
260
Practical hints
What to do if &
Text messages
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
ABS ABS SYSTEM The ABS has detected a malfunction and Continue driving with added caution.
VISIT WORKSHOP! has switched off. The ESP, BAS, EBB and
Have the system checked at an autho-
4-ETS are also deactivated.
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
The brake system is still functioning nor- ter as soon as possible.
mally but without the ABS available.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
Wheels will lock during hard braking, re-
creases the risk of accident.
ducing steering capability.
VISIT WORKSHOP! The ABS or the ABS display is malfunc- Continue driving with added caution.
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION: tioning.
Have the system checked at an autho-
Wheels will lock in hard braking reducing rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
steering capability. ter as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accident.
BAS BRAKE ASSIST The BAS has detected a malfunction and Continue driving with added caution.
VISIT WORKSHOP! switched off.
Have the system checked at an autho-
The brake system is still functioning nor- rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
mally but without the BAS available. ter as soon as possible.
Wheels will lock in hard braking reducing
Failure to follow these instructions in-
steering capability.
creases the risk of accident.
261
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution
BAS VISIT WORKSHOP! The BAS or the BAS display is malfunc- Continue driving with added caution.
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION: tioning.
Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increas-
es the risk of accident.
DIFFERENTIAL ABS NOT AVAILABLE You have engaged the differential locks. The ABS switches on again after the dif-
LOCK DIFFERENTIAL LOCKED ferential locks have been disengaged.
ESP VISIT WORKSHOP! The ESP or the ESP display is malfunc- Continue driving with added caution.
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION: tioning.
Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increas-
es the risk of accident.
ESP The ESP is temporarily unavailable. The The display will clear itself after driving a
NOT AVAILABLE self-diagnosis has not been completed. short-distance at more than approximately
12 mph (20 km/h).
262
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution
ESP ESP The charging voltage has fallen below When the voltage is above this value
NOT AVAILABLE 10 volts and the ESP has switched off. again, the ESP is operational again.
If necessary, have the generator (alter-
nator) and battery checked.
The ESP is deactivated because of a mal- Synchronize the ESP. With vehicle sta-
function or interrupted power supply. The tionary and the engine running, turn
ABS and BAS might not be operational. the steering wheel completely to the
left and then to the right to synchro-
The system must be resynchronized.
nize the ESP.
If the ESP message does not go out:
Continue driving with added caution.
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possi-
ble.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accident.
! both directions as far as it will go with-
out the wheels hitting any objects, e.g.
When synchronizing the ESP, make
a road curb.
sure you can turn the steering wheel in
263
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution
ESP ESP The ESP is switched off due to a malfunc- Continue driving with added caution.
VISIT WORKSHOP! tion or an interruption in the power sup-
Have the system checked at an autho-
ply.
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
The brake system is still functioning nor- ter as soon as possible.
mally but without ESP, ABS and BAS avail-
Failure to follow these instructions in-
able.
creases the risk of accident.
If in addition the ABS is malfunctioning,
only partial engine output will be avail-
able.
264
Practical hints
What to do if &
Symbol messages
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
# BATTERY/ALTERNATOR The battery was charged with a battery Have the battery checked at a service
VISIT WORKSHOP! charger or jump started. station.
The battery is no longer charging. Stop immediately and check the
Possible causes: poly-V-belt.
alternator malfunctioning If it is broken:
broken poly-V-belt Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an in-
operative water pump which may re-
sult in serious engine damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty. Notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
If it is intact:
Turn off unnecessary electric consum-
ers.
Drive immediately to the nearest au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
UNDERVOLTAGE The battery has insufficient voltage. Start the engine.
ENGINE ON!
265
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
# UNDERVOLTAGE The battery has insufficient voltage. Have the battery checked at a ser-
SWITCH CONSUMERS OFF! vice station.
2 BRAKE WEAR The brake pads have reached their Have the brake pads replaced as
VISIT WORKSHOP! wear limit. soon as possible.
3 BRAKE FLUID There is insufficient brake fluid in the Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle
VISIT WORKSHOP! reservoir. and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not
solve the problem.
!
Warning! G
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
Driving with the last message displayed can
minimum mark or below, have the
result in an accident. Have your brake sys-
brake system checked for brake pad
tem checked immediately.
thickness and leaks.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid res-
!
ervoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
Brake pad thickness must be visually
engine parts and the brake fluid catching
checked by a qualified technician at the
fire. You can be seriously burned.
intervals specified in the Service book-
let.
266
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
3 ELEC. BRAKE BOOST. The EBB has detected a malfunction and Continue driving with added cau-
VISIT WORKSHOP! has switched off. tion.
The brake system is still functioning nor- Have the system checked at an au-
mally but without the EBB available. thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accident.
; (USA only) PARK. BRAKE You are driving with the parking brake Release the parking brake
RELEASE BRAKE! set. ( page 44).
! (Canada only)
267
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
B COOLANT The coolant level is too low. Add coolant ( page 232).
CHECK LEVEL!
If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
!
Warning! G
Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
the message and symbol displayed
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may cause serious engine damage not
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount
of coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat causing serious
engine damage.
Observe the coolant temperature dis-
play ( page 112).
268
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
� COOLANT The coolant is too hot. Stop the vehicle and turn off the en-
STOP, ENGINE OFF! gine.
Only start the engine again after the
message disappears. You could other-
wise damage the engine.
During severe operating conditions and
Warning! G
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
perature may rise close to 248�F (120�C).
Driving when your engine is badly overheat-
!
ed can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
The engine should not be operated with
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
the coolant temperature above 248�F
(120�C). Doing so may cause serious
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
engine damage which is not covered by
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
the hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
269
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
� COOLANT The poly-V-belt could be broken. Stop immediately and check the
STOP, ENGINE OFF! poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an in-
operative water pump which may re-
sult in damage to the engine. Notify an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
If it is in order:
Do not continue to drive the vehicle
with this message displayed. Doing so
could result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
COOLANT The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunc- Observe the coolant temperature dis-
VISIT WORKSHOP! tioning. play ( page 112).
Have the fan replaced as soon as pos-
sible.
270
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
Ń CRUISE CONTROL Cruise control is malfunctioning. Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! Light Truck Center.
J DOOR OPEN! You are attempting to drive with one or Close the doors.
more doors open.
e ENGINE AIR FILTER The engine filter is clogged and must be Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
VISIT WORKSHOP! replaced. Light Truck Center as soon as
possible.
: USA only: The engine oil level is too low. Add engine oil ( page 231) and check
ADD 1.0 Qt. ENGINE OIL the engine oil level ( page 229).
WHEN NEXT REFUELING!
Canada only:
ADD 1.0 LITER ENG. OIL
WHEN NEXT REFUELING!
When the ADD 1.0 QT. ENG. OIL - WHEN Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil
!
NEXT REFUELLING! (Canada: 1.0 LITER) leaks are noted, drive to the nearest ser-
The engine oil level warnings should
message appears while the engine is run- vice station where the engine oil should be
not be ignored. Extended driving with
ning and at operating temperature, the en- topped to the required level with an ap-
the symbol displayed could result in se-
gine oil level has dropped to approximately proved oil.
rious engine damage that is not cov-
the minimum level.
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.
271
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
: ENGINE OIL LEVEL You have added too much engine oil. Have oil siphoned or drained off. Ob-
REDUCE OIL LEVEL! There is a risk of damaging the engine or serve all legal requirements with re-
the catalytic converter. spect to its disposal.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL There is no oil in the engine. There is a Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
STOP, ENGINE OFF! danger of engine damage. soon as possible.
Turn off the engine.
Add engine oil ( page 231) and check
the engine oil level ( page 229).
ENGINE OIL It may be that there is water in the engine Have the oil checked.
VISIT WORKSHOP! oil.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL The engine oil has dropped to a critical Check the engine oil level
VISIT WORKSHOP! level. ( page 229) and add oil as required
( page 231).
If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
The measuring system is malfunctioning. Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
272
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
A RESERVE FUEL The fuel level has dropped below the re- Refuel at the next gas station
GO TO GAS STATION serve mark. ( page 224).
CHECK GAS CAP The fuel cap is not closed tightly. Check the fuel cap ( page 224).
SEE OPERATOR S MANUAL
Y HOOD OPEN! You are driving with the hood open. Close the hood ( page 228).
I REMOVE KEY! You have forgotten to remove the Smart- Remove the SmartKey from the starter
Key. switch.
REPLACE KEY No additional code available for Smart- Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! Key. Light Truck Center.
273
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
. 3RD BRAKE LIGHT The high mounted brake lamp is malfunc- Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
CHECK LIGHT! tioning. This message will only appear if Center as soon as possible.
all light emitting diodes have stopped
working.
ADD. TURN SIG., L The left turn signal in the exterior rear Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
CHECK LIGHT! view mirror is malfunctioning. This mes- possible.
sage will only appear if all light emitting
diodes have stopped working.
ADD. TURN SIG., R The right turn signal in the exterior rear Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
CHECK LIGHT! view mirror is malfunctioning. This mes- possible.
sage will only appear if all light emitting
diodes have stopped working.
AUTOM. LIGHT ON You have left the SmartKey in the starter Remove the SmartKey from the starter
REMOVE KEY! switch. switch.
BRAKE LIGHT Brake lamp illumination is delayed or Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! lamp is permanently on. Light Truck Center as soon as possi-
ble.
BRAKE LIGHT, L The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
CHECK LIGHT! Center as soon as possible.
274
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
. BRAKE LIGHT, R The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
CHECK LIGHT! Center as soon as possible.
FRONT FOGLIGHT, L The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LIGHT!
FRONT FOGLIGHT, R The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LIGHT!
FR. L. PARK. LAMP The left parking lamps are malfunction- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LIGHT! ing. A backup bulb is being used.
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
FR. R. PARK LAMP The right parking lamps are malfunction- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LIGHT! ing. A backup bulb is being used.
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
HIGH BEAM, L The left high beam lamp is malfunction- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LIGHT! ing.
HIGH BEAM, R The right high beam lamp is malfunction- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LIGHT! ing.
275
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
. LIGHT SENSOR The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The In the control system, set lamp opera-
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! headlamps switch on automatically. tion to manual ( page 129).
Switch on headlamps using the exteri-
or lamp switch ( page 104).
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possi-
ble.
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT, L The left license plate lamp is malfunction- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LIGHT! ing.
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT R The right license plate lamp is malfunc- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LIGHT! tioning.
LIGHTS The display appears if the driver s door is Insert SmartKey in the starter switch.
TURN OFF LIGHTS! opened with the engine shut off and no
Switch off the lights ( page 104).
SmartKey in the starter switch.
LOW BEAM, L The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
CHECK LIGHT! Light Truck Center as soon as possi-
ble.
LOW BEAM, R The right low beam lamp is malfunction- Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
CHECK LIGHT! ing. Light Truck Center as soon as possi-
ble.
276
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
. MARKER LIGHT, FL The left front side marker lamp is mal- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LIGHT! functioning.
MARKER LIGHT, FR The right front side marker lamp is mal- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LIGHT! functioning.
REAR FOGLIGHT The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LIGHT!
REAR FOGLIGHT A lamp is malfunctioning. A backup bulb Turn the rear fog lamp off.
TURN OFF is being used.
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
REVERSE LIGHT, R The right backup lamp is malfunctioning. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LIGHT!
TAIL LIGHT, L The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LIGHT! backup bulb is being used.
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
TAIL LIGHT, R The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LIGHT! backup bulb is being used.
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
TURN SIG., LF The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LIGHT! tioning. A backup bulb is being used.
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
277
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
. TURN SIG., RF The right front turn signal lamp is mal- Replace the bulb as soon as possi-
CHECK LIGHT! functioning. A backup bulb is being ble.
BACK-UP LIGHT ON! used.
TURN SIG., LR The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- Replace the bulb as soon as possi-
CHECK LIGHT! tioning. A backup bulb is being used. ble.
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
TURN SIG., RR The right rear turn signal lamp is mal- Replace the bulb as soon as possi-
CHECK LIGHT! functioning. A backup bulb is being ble.
BACK-UP LIGHT ON! used.
VISIT WORKSHOP! The display for the lamps or the system Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION is malfunctioning. Light Truck Center as soon as pos-
sible.
TURN SIG. MIRROR, L The left turn signal in the side mirror is Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
CHECK LIGHT! malfunctioning. This message will only Light Truck Center as soon as pos-
appear if all light emitting diodes have sible.
stopped working.
TURN SIG. MIRROR, L The right turn signal in the side mirror is Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
CHECK LIGHT! malfunctioning. This message will only Light Truck Center as soon as pos-
appear if all light emitting diodes have sible.
stopped working.
278
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
1 RESTRAINT SYSTEM The system is malfunctioning. The air- Drive with added caution to the near-
SERVICE bags or emergency tensioning device est authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
(ETD) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to Truck Center.
activate in an accident.
RESTRAINT SYSTEM The system is malfunctioning. The air- Drive with added caution to the near-
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! bags or emergency tensioning device est authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
(ETD) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to Truck Center.
activate in an accident.
Otherwise the SRS may not be activated
Warning! G
when needed in an accident, which could re-
sult in serious or fatal injury, or it might de-
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-
ploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
could also result in injury.
operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend
that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center immediately to have the
system checked.
279
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
< SEAT BELT SYSTEM The seat belt system is malfunctioning. Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! Light Truck Center as soon as possi-
ble.
DRIVER S SEAT BELT The display reminds you and your passen- Fasten the seat belts.
FASTEN SEAT BELT! gers to fasten seat belts.
FR. PASS. SEAT BELT The display reminds you and your passen- Fasten the seat belts.
FASTEN SEAT BELT! gers to fasten seat belts.
ż TC IN NEUTRAL No gear has been selected in the transfer Engage transfer case to gear position
case, it is in NEUTRAL. HIGH or LOW ( page 145).
Warning! G
If the transfer case is in NEUTRAL, the
P position of transmission will not hold vehi-
cle. The parking brake must be applied to
hold vehicle in place.
280
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution
ż TC SHIFT The shift process in the transfer case was Repeat the shift process ( page 145).
CANCELLED canceled because of a malfunction.
TC SHIFT CONDITIONS You have not met the shift conditions for Repeat the shift process ( page 145).
NOT FULFILLED a selection process in the transfer case.
TRANSFER CASE The transfer case is malfunctioning. Do not switch the transfer case on.
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possi-
ble.
K CLOSE You have opened the driver s door with Close the sliding/pop-up roof
SUNROOF! the SmartKey removed from the starter ( page 166).
switch and the sliding/pop-up roof open.
J CLOSE You have opened the driver s door with Close the sliding/pop-up roof
SUNROOF! the SmartKey removed from the starter ( page 166).
switch and the sliding/pop-up roof open.
L TELE AID One or more main functions of the Tele Have the Tele Aid system checked by
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! Aid system are malfunctioning. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
� FUNCTION This display appears if button � or
NOT AVAILABLE! � on the multifunction steering wheel
is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.
281
Practical hints
What to do if &
Display Possible cause Possible solution
Ę TRUNK OPEN! This message will appear whenever the Close the tailgate.
tailgate is open.
G VISIT WORKSHOP! The instrument cluster display is malfunc- Continue driving with added caution.
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION: tioning.
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Some systems themselves may also have Light Truck Center as soon as
failed. possible.
ą VISIT WORKSHOP! Certain electronic systems are unable to Have the electronic systems checked
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION: relay information to the control system. by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
The following systems may have failed: Truck Center.
Coolant temperature display
Tachometer
Cruise control display
W WASHER FLUID The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 Add washer fluid ( page 339).
CHECK LEVEL! of total reservoir capacity.
282
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Where will I find ...?
First aid kit Vehicle tool kit The following is included:
Vehicle tool kit
The first aid kit is stored in the storage The vehicle tool kit is stored under a cover
Wheel wrench
pocket in the front passenger door. in the rear footwell.
Vehicle jack
1 First aid kit 1 Cover
2 Tab
i
Fold cover 1 to the side.
Check expiration dates and contents
Pull vehicle tool kit out using tab 2.
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
283
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Vehicle jack CD changer
Warning! G
The vehicle jack is under the rear bench The CD changer is located on the left side
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
seat. of the cargo compartment.
up the vehicle under the axle housing. To
help avoid personal injury, use the jack only
to lift the vehicle during a wheel change.
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is sup-
ported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
Always firmly set parking brake and block
wheels before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
CD changer
1 Cover
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es-
2 Tab
pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
i
3 Vehicle jack
on level surface. Make sure the jack is posi-
For CD changer instructions, see sepa-
tioned correctly under the axle housing. Al-
Fold the rear bench seat forward
rate COMAND operator s manual.
ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient
( page 177).
capacity jackstands before working under
Open cover 1.
the vehicle.
Open tab 2 and remove vehicle
jack 3.
Please also observe the safety guidelines
in the  Flat tire section ( page 306)
when using the jack.
284
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Spare wheel Open lock for cover ring 1 with
key 2 for the spare wheel cover.
The spare wheel is located under a cover
Fold tab 3 downwards.
on the outside of the vehicle s tailgate.
For information on rim and tire specifica-
tions, see ( page 329) and ( page 330).
Removing cover
5 Catch
6 Recess
i
4 Cover plate
When replacing cover plate 4, make
sure catch 5 engages in recess 6.
Pull cover ring 1 slightly outwards in
direction of arrows and remove.
Make sure the lock faces downwards
when mounting cover ring 1.
Pull cover plate 4 upward towards
1 Cover ring
you.
For safety reasons, check regularly that
2 Key
the spare wheel is securely fastened.
3 Tab
285
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Removing the spare wheel
i
Warning! G
After changing the wheel, secure the
replaced wheel on the spare wheel car-
Make sure no one is injured when removing
rier. Make sure the wheel cannot come
the spare wheel.
loose.
Grip wheel from the sides.
Cover the wheel with the cover plate.
Keep hands from beneath the wheel.
Repair or replace damaged tire as soon
as possible and return spare tire as
original spare.
1 Mounting screws
For more information on changing the
wheel, see  Flat tire ( page 306).
Unscrew mounting screws 1.
Remove the spare wheel.
286
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle Unlocking the tailgate
If you are unable to unlock the tailgate with
If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with
the SmartKey, open the tailgate with the
the SmartKey, open the driver s door and
mechanical key as follows:
the tailgate using the mechanical key.
The passenger door cannot be unlocked
manually.
i
Unlocking your vehicle with the me-
1 Mechanical key locking tab
chanical key will trigger the anti-theft
2 Mechanical key
alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do
one of the following:
Move locking tab 1 in direction of ar-
row and slide the mechanical key 2
Press button R
or 9 on the
out of the housing.
1 Unlocking in an emergency
SmartKey.
2 Lock cylinder
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
Unlocking the driver s door
3 Handle
switch.
Unlock the door with the mechanical
Insert the mechanical key into the tail-
key. To do so, push the mechanical key
gate lock.
in the lock until it stops and turn it to
Turn the mechanical key counterclock-
the left.
wise to position 1 and hold it in this
position.
287
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Press lock cylinder 2 and pull on tail- Locking the vehicle Changing batteries in the SmartKey
gate handle 3.
If you are unable to lock the vehicle with If the batteries in the SmartKey are dis-
Open the tailgate to the side.
the SmartKey, lock it with the mechanical charged, the vehicle can no longer be
key as follows: locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
Warning! G have the batteries replaced at an autho-
Close the passenger doors and the tail-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
gate.
The tailgate swings open to one side. Always
Press the central locking switch in the
make sure there is sufficient clearance for
Warning! G
cockpit ( page 92).
tailgate.
Check to see whether the locking
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
knobs on the passenger doors are still
i
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
visible. If necessary, push them down
Unlocking your vehicle with the me-
immediately.
manually.
chanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do
Slide the mechanical key 2 out of the
Batteries contain materials that can harm
one of the following:
SmartKey.
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Press button R
or 9 on the
Lock the driver s door with the me- Recycling of batteries is the preferred
SmartKey.
method of disposal. Many states require
chanical key.
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
Check if the tailgate is locked. If nec-
for recycling.
switch.
cessary lock the tailgate with the me-
chanical key.
288
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Remove mechanical key ( page 287). Using a lint-free cloth, insert new bat-
teries under the contact spring with the
Insert the mechanical key 1 in side
plus (+) side facing up.
opening and push briefly gray slide.
Return battery compartment into hous-
Battery compartment 2 is unlatched.
ing until locked in place.
Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
SmartKey housing in direction of ar-
SmartKey.
row.
i
Remove the batteries.
When inserting the batteries, make
1 Mechanical key
sure they are clean and free of lint.
2 Battery compartment
Replacement batteries:
Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent.
i
When changing batteries, always re-
place both batteries.
The required replacement batteries are
3 Battery
available at any Mercedes-Benz Light
4 Contact spring
Truck Center.
289
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Fuel filler flap Manually unlocking the transmission
gear selector lever
The emergency release is in the cargo
compartment behind the rear panel trim. In the case of power failure the transmis-
sion gear selector lever can be manually
unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
3 Release strap
Pull strap 3 upwards.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked and can
be opened.
1 Edge protection
2 Rear panel trim
1 Pin
Open the tailgate.
Remove edge protection 1 from the
door pillar.
Remove rear panel trim 2.
290
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Insert a pin 1, e.g. ball point pen, into
the covered opening.
Perform the following two steps simul-
taneously:
Push pin 1 down.
Move gear selector lever from
position P.
Remove pin 1.
The cover returns to its closed position af-
ter moving the gear selector lever to posi-
tions D+ and D-.
i
The gear selector lever is locked again
when moving it to position P.
291
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Sliding/pop-up roof Turn screwdriver 4 clockwise to:
close slide roof
You can open or close the sliding/pop-up
raise roof at the rear
roof manually in the case of power failure.
Turn screwdriver 4 counterclockwise
The sliding/pop-up roof drive is located on
to:
the left side of the cargo compartment be-
hind the rear panel trim.
open slide roof
lower roof at the rear
3 Key (vehicle tool kit)
4 Screwdriver (vehicle tool kit)
i
Do not disconnect electrical connec-
tors.
Fit key 3 into hexagon nut of drive.
1 Edge protection
2 Rear panel trim
Insert screwdriver 4 into the key as a
lever.
Open the tailgate.
Remove edge protection 1 from door
pillar.
Remove rear panel trim 1.
292
Practical hints
Brush guard*
Brush guard*
i
Warning! G
Only lower brush guard to clean head
lamps or to replace bulbs.
The brush guard is designed solely to en-
hance the appearance of the vehicle and
help protect grille and head lights from mi-
nor mishaps, either on- or off-road. Since
the safety characteristics are limited in the
event of an accident, brush guards are not
intended to prevent injury or damage in the
event of an accident. Also check state and
local regulations on installation and use.
Raise and lower brush guard in an open
space with plenty of room.
To help prevent personal injury when open-
ing or closing the brush guard, use extreme
caution not to trap hands or feet.
The brush guard must be in raised and
locked position while driving.
293
Practical hints
Brush guard*
Lowering and raising brush guard Lowering Raising and securing
While holding brush guard firmly, open Flip up brush guard until it contacts end
quick lock 2 using lock and unlocking stop joint 4.
handle 1.
Quick lock stop pin 2 must engage
Gently lower brush guard until it the cross slot recess in lock 3.
reaches its fully lowered position.
Now turn quick lock 2 so that quick
lock makes contact with end stop
joint 4.
Lock quick lock 2 on both sides of
brush guard using lock and unlocking
1 Lock and unlocking handle
handle 1.
2 Quick lock
!
3 Lock
4 End stop joint Make sure both quick stop pins 2 are
seated fully in lock 3.
294
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper Bulbs Front lamps
exterior lighting and signaling. It is there-
Lamp Type
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as-
semblies are in good working order at all
1 Additional turn sig- LED
times.
nal lamp
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
2 Turn signal lamp 1156 NA
important. Have headlamps checked and
3 Side marker lamp T 4 W
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
4 High and low beam H4 60 (55 W)
bulb has been replaced. See your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
Parking and stand- T 4 W
for headlamp adjustment.
ing lamp
5 Fog lamp H3 (55 W)
i
Backup bulbs will be brought into use
when the following lamps malfunction:
Parking lamps
Turn signal lamps
Tail lamps
295
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps Notes on bulb replacement Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.
Lamp Type
If the newly installed bulb does not
Warning! G
6 High mounted brake LED
come on, visit an authorized
lamp
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
7 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Al-
Have the LEDs for the following lamps
low the lamp to cool down before changing
replaced by an authorized
Brake lamp P 21 W
a bulb.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Tail, parking and R 5 W
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
standing lamp The additional turn signals in the ex-
bulb can explode if you:
terior rear view mirrors
8 Backup lamp P 21 W
touch or move it when hot
The high mounted brake lamp
9 License plate lamps C 5 W
drop the bulb
a Rear fog lamp P 21 W
i
scratch the bulb
b Side marker lamp T 4 W Have the headlamp settings checked
Wear eye and hand protection.
regularly by a Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Use only 12 volt bulbs of the same type
Do not turn the headlamp adjusting
and with the specified watt rating.
screws. If the adjusting screws are
Switch lights off before changing a bulb
turned, the headlamp setting must be
to prevent short circuits.
checked by a Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
296
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps Removing
Headlamp assembly (halogen)
i
For vehicles with brush guard*:
Fold the brush guard* down before re-
placing bulbs ( page 293).
G55AMG:
Remove the protective grille before re-
4 Securing screw (headlamp)
placing the bulbs.
Left headlamp, right headlamp laterally re-
Unscrew headlamp-securing
versed
screws 4.
1 Securing screw (trim panel)
Remove headlamp 3.
2 Head lamp trim panel
3 Headlamp
Installing
Switch off the lights.
Insert headlamp 3 and screw in head-
Unscrew securing screws 1.
lamp-securing screws 4.
Remove head lamp trim panel 2 and
Install head lamp trim panel 2 and
seal.
seal and screw in securing screws 1.
297
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Clip in retainer spring 4.
Plug electrical connector 3 onto
bulb 5.
Press on protection cover 1.
Parking and standing lamp bulb
Pull off electrical connector 2 from
bulb socket 6.
Push bulb into bulb socket 6, turn
1 Protection cover 4 Retainer spring
counterclockwise and remove.
2 Electrical connector (parking and 5 Bulb for high and low beam
standing lamps) 6 Bulb socket for parking and standing
Insert new bulb in bulb socket 6, push
3 Electrical connector (high and low lamps
in and turn clockwise until it clicks in.
beam)
Plug electrical connector 2 onto bulb
High and low beam bulb
socket 6.
Remove protection cover 1.
Pull off electrical connector 3.
Unclip retainer spring 4.
Remove bulb 5.
Insert new bulb so that the base lo-
cates in the recess on the holder.
298
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front fog lamp Fog lamp bulb
Removing
4 Securing screw (fog lamp)
5 Adjusting screw (fog lamp)
6 Electrical connector
7 Retainer spring
Unscrew fog lamp-securing screws 4.
Right front fog lamp, left front fog lamp lat-
8 Bulb socket
erally reversed Remove fog lamp 3.
Pull off electrical connector 6.
1 Securing screw (trim panel)
Installing
Unclip retainer spring 7.
2 Fog lamp trim panel
3 Fog lamp
Insert fog lamp 3 and screw in fog
Pull out bulb socket 8.
lamp-securing screws 4.
Switch off the lights.
Insert the new bulb so that the base lo-
Reinstall fog lamp trim panel 2 and
cates in the recess on the holder.
Unscrew securing screws 1.
screw in securing screws 1.
Clip in retainer spring 7.
Remove fog lamp trim panel 2 and
seal.
Plug electrical connector 6 together.
299
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front turn signal lamp Side marker lamp
The following description applies to both
i
the front and the rear side marker lamps.
G55AMG:
Remove the protective grille before re-
placing bulbs.
3 Bulb
Push bulb 3 into socket, turn counter-
clockwise and remove.
Front side marker shown
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
turn clockwise until it clicks in. 1 Securing screw
2 Side marker lamp housing
Reinstall turn signal lens 2 and screw
1 Securing screw in securing screws 1. Switch off the lights.
2 Turn signal lens
Unscrew securing screws 1.
i
Switch off the lights.
Remove side marker lamp housing 2.
Do not overtighten securing screws 1.
Unscrew securing screws 1.
Otherwise turn signal lens 2 could be
damaged.
Remove turn signal lens 2.
300
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Tail lamp assemblies
i
G55AMG:
Remove the protective grille before re-
placing bulbs.
3 Dust cover 4 Bulb
Remove dust cover 3. Push bulb 4 into socket, turn counter-
clockwise and remove.
Press catch aside and pull out bulb
socket from side marker lamp Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
housing 2. turn clockwise until it clicks in.
Insert bulb socket in lamp housing 2
and reinstall the dust cover.
Reinstall side marker lamp housing 2
and screw in securing screws 1.
1 Securing screw
2 Lens
i
Switch off the lights.
Do not overtighten the securing
screw 1. Otherwise side marker lamp Unscrew securing screws 1.
housing 2 could be damaged.
Remove lens 2.
301
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear fog lamp/Backup lamp
3 Bulb
3 Bulb for turn signal lamp
4 Bulb for tail lamp 1 Securing screw
Push bulb 3 into socket, turn counter-
5 Bulb for brake lamp 2 Lens
clockwise and remove.
Push defective bulb 3, 4 or 5 into Switch off the lights.
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
socket, turn counterclockwise and re-
turn clockwise until it clicks in.
Unscrew securing screws 1.
move.
Reinstall lens 2 and screw in securing
Remove lens 2.
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
screws 1.
turn clockwise until it clicks in.
i
Reinstall lens 2 and screw in securing
Do not overtighten securing screws 1.
screws 1.
Otherwise lens 2 could be damaged.
i
Do not overtighten securing screws 1.
Otherwise lens 2 could be damaged.
302
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
License plate lamp
3 Tubular lamp
1 Securing screw
Replace tubular lamp 3.
2 Holder with light lens
Reinstall holder 2 and screw in secur-
Switch off the lights.
ing screws 1.
Unscrew securing screws 1.
i
Remove holder 2.
Do not overtighten securing screws 1.
Otherwise holder with light lens 2
could be damaged.
303
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Replacing wiper blades
Removing wiper blades
The wiper with air spoiler should be
Warning! G
mounted on the driver s side
Fold the wiper arm forward.
For your convenience, we recommend
For safety reasons, remove SmartKey from
that you have this work carried out by
starter switch before replacing a wiper
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
blade. Otherwise the motor could suddenly
Truck Center.
turn on and cause injury.
!
Never open the hood when the wiper
arm is folded forward.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
1 Safety tab
of the impact from the tensioning
2 Wiper blade
spring could crack the windshield.
3 Wiper arm
4 Attachment link
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
the windshield glass without a wiper
Turn wiper blade 2 at a right angle to
blade inserted.
wiper arm 3.
Make certain that the wiper blades are
Press safety tab 1 of attachment
properly installed. Improperly installed
link 4 down and slide wiper blade 2
wiper blades may cause windshield
from the end of wiper arm 3.
damage.
Remove wiper blade 2.
304
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Installing wiper blades
Guide wiper blade 2 so that opening
goes through wiper arm 3.
Press wiper blade 2 into arch of wiper
arm 3 until locking spring 1 engages
in attachment link 4.
Fold the wiper arm back to rest on the
windshield.
305
Practical hints
Flat tire
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle Information on spare wheel
Warning! G
When you replace the vehicle s tires, you
Park the vehicle as far as possible from
can use the spare wheel as a regular wheel
G 55 AMG only
moving traffic on a hard surface.
if:
Vehicles with different tire dimensions on
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
it is not more than six years old
the front and rear axle: rim and tire size of
Engage the steering wheel lock in the
spare wheel and normal wheel differ. Han-
rim and tire are the same model as the
straight ahead position and set the
dling will be adversely affected when the
regular wheels
parking brake.
spare wheel is used.
Move the gear selector lever to P.
Do not exceed the maximum speed of
Warning! G
50 mph (80 km/h).
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
If the spare tire is more than six years old or
is not the same model as the regular tires,
Remove the vehicle tool kit
have the spare tire replaced with a new tire
( page 283) and the jack
at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
( page 284).
Center.
Remove the spare wheel from the
Never operate the vehicle with more than
spare wheel mounting bracket
one spare tire.
( page 285).
Warning! G
For your safety, remove spare wheel from
the spare wheel mounting bracket before
undertaking any further steps.
306
Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting the spare wheel
Warning! G
Prepare the vehicle ( page 306).
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle under the axle housing. To
Lifting the vehicle
help avoid personal injury, use the jack only
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
to lift the vehicle during a wheel change.
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is sup-
(not included) or other sizable objects.
ported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
When changing wheel on a level surface:
away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
Always firmly set parking brake and block
Wheel wrench
Place one chock in front of and one be-
wheels before raising vehicle with jack.
hind the wheel that is diagonally oppo-
On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
site to the wheel being changed. Do not disengage parking brake while the
not yet remove the wheel bolts (ap-
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
proximately one full turn with wrench).
When changing wheel on a hill:
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es-
Place chocks on the downhill side
pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
blocking both wheels of the other axle.
on level surface. Make sure the jack is posi-
tioned correctly under the axle housing. Al-
ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
If the vehicle is not raised as described, it
could slip off the jack as a result of vibra-
tions (e.g. opening or closing a door or the
tailgate).
307
Practical hints
Flat tire
Pump handle (three pieces) Jack
Place jack on firm ground.
1 Indent for activation of release bolt 2 2 Release bolt
Position jack under the axle housing,
so that it is always vertical (plumb-line)
Assemble the pump handle for the Close release bolt 2.
as seen from the side, even if the vehi-
jack. The pump handle is located in the
To do so, turn indent 1 to the right in
cle is parked on an incline.
vehicle tool kit.
the pump lever until its stop.
Be certain the jack arm is positioned
i
correctly under the axle housing (axle
must fall into jack contour).
Never turn release bolt 2 more than
one or two revolutions. Hydraulic fluid
Jack up the vehicle by pumping (arrow)
can otherwise escape.
until the wheel is clear of the ground.
Never start engine while vehicle is
raised.
308
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel Mounting the new wheel
Warning! G
Remove the wheel bolts. Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
Use only genuine equipment
!
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel
Push the wheel onto the wheel hub and
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
bolts may come loose.
press firmly.
This could result in damage to the bolt
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the ve-
Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
and wheel hub threads.
hicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
slightly.
tip over.
Remove the wheel.
Warning! G
Warning! G
Always replace wheel bolts that are dam-
aged or rusted.
Make sure no one is injured when removing
the wheel.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Grip wheel from the sides.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be re-
Keep hands from beneath the wheel.
paired immediately. Do not continue to drive
under these circumstances! Contact an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
or call Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-
ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident.
Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
309
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lowering the vehicle Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol- Press the jack piston in again and close
lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat- the lowering screw. Store the jack
Using the pump lever, open the lower-
ed (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight. ( page 284) and the other vehicle
ing screw on the jack approximately
Observe a tightening torque of 97 lb-ft tools ( page 283).
one turn ( page 308).
(130 Nm).
After changing the wheel, secure the
The vehicle is resting fully on its own
damaged wheel on the spare wheel
weight.
mounting bracket ( page 286). Make
Warning! G
Remove the jack.
sure the wheel cannot come loose.
Have the tightening torque checked after
After use, disassemble pump handle
Check the tire inflation pressure and
changing a wheel as soon as possible. The
( page 308) and store jack in the des-
correct it if necessary.
wheels could come loose if they are not
ignated storage compartment
A table with the tire pressure values for
tightened to a torque of 97 lb-ft (130 Nm).
( page 284).
your vehicle is located on the fuel filler
flap.
1 - 5 Wheel bolts
310
Practical hints
Battery
Battery
The battery is located in front of the rear Charging the battery
Warning! G
seat bench and below the cup holder
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
Warning! G
Warning! G
this could result in a short circuit.
Never charge a battery while still installed in
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
Failure to follow these instructions can re-
the vehicle. Gases may escape during charg-
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
sult in severe injury or death.
ing and cause explosions that may result in
Observe all safety instructions and precau-
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
tions when handling automotive batteries
the environment if disposed of improperly.
( page 235).
Have the battery removed at a
Large 12 volt storage batteries contain
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
lead.
you might get injured.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred !
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
method of disposal. Many states require
Have the battery checked regularly by
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
for recycling.
Truck Center.
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
Refer to Service Booklet for mainte-
nance intervals or contact your autho-
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
Center for further information.
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
If you charge the battery yourself, make
smoking, etc.
sure to comply with the operating instruc-
tions for your battery charger.
311
Practical hints
Battery
Disconnecting the battery
i i
With a disconnected battery The following procedures must be car-
!
ried out following any interruption of
you will no longer be able to turn
Never loosen or detach battery termi- battery power (e.g. due to reconnec-
the SmartKey in the starter switch
nal clamps while the engine is running tion):
the gear selector lever will remain
or the SmartKey is in the starter switch.
Set the clock (see COMAND opera-
locked in position P
Otherwise the alternator and other
tor s manual).
electronic components could be se-
Resynchronize the front seat head
verely damaged. Reconnecting the battery
restraints and seat adjustment fore,
aft ( page 95).
Turn off all electrical consumers.
Turn off all electrical consumers.
Synchronize the ESP ( page 263).
Connect the positive lead and fasten its
Disconnect the battery negative lead.
cover.
Remove the cover from the positive ter-
Connect the negative lead.
minal.
Disconnect the battery positive lead. !
Never invert the terminal connections.
Remove the breather hose from the
battery.
Install the breather hose.
!
The battery, its filler caps and the vent
tube must always be securely installed
when the vehicle is in operation.
312
Practical hints
Jump starting
Jump starting
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
!
Warning! G
be started with jumper cables and the bat-
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at-
tery of another vehicle. Observe the follow-
tempts.
Failure to follow these directions will cause
ing:
Do not attempt to start the engine us-
damage to the electronic components, and
Jump starting should only be performed
ing a battery quick charge unit.
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
when the engine and catalytic convert-
injury or death.
If engine does not run after several un-
er are cold.
Never lean over batteries while connecting successful starting attempts, have it
Do not start the engine if the battery is
or jump starting, you might get injured. checked at the nearest authorized
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
Only use 12 volt battery to jump start
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
your vehicle. Jump starting with a more
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
repeated failed starting attempts may
powerful battery could damage the ve-
flush affected area with water, and seek
damage the catalytic converter and
hicle s electrical system, which will not
medical help if necessary.
may present a fire risk.
be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim-
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
Make sure the jumper cables do not
ited Warranty.
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
have loose or missing insulation.
Use only jumper cables with sufficient
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
Make sure the cable clamps do not
cross-section and insulated terminal
improper connection of jumper cables,
touch any other metal part while the
clamps.
smoking, etc.
other end is still attached to a battery.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery Always make sure the jumper cables
can result in it exploding, causing personal are not on or near pulleys, fans, or oth-
!
injury. er parts that move when an engine is
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
started or running.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
313
Practical hints
Jump starting
Now you can again turn on the electrical
Warning! G
consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
any circumstances.
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Remove the jumper cables first from
Do not smoke.
negative terminals 3 of the batteries
Observe all safety instructions and precau-
and then from positive terminals 2.
tions when handling automotive batteries
You can now turn on the lights.
( page 311).
Have the battery checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
The jump-start contacts are located in the
1 Cover
Light Truck Center.
engine compartment.
2 Positive (+) terminal
Make sure the two vehicles do not
3 Negative (-) terminal
touch.
Open cover 1 of the positive terminal
Turn off all electrical consumers.
of both vehicles.
Apply parking brake.
Connect the positive terminals 2 of
the batteries with the jumper cable.
Shift gear selector lever to position P.
Clamp cable to discharged battery first.
Start engine of the vehicle with the
Connect negative terminals 3 of the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
batteries with the jumper cable. Clamp
cable to charged battery first.
Start the engine of the disabled vehi-
cle.
314
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehi- ground only so far as necessary to have the
!
cle be transported with all wheels off the vehicle moved to a safe location where the
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel recommended towing methods can be em-
lift/dolly equipment. This method is pref- ployed.
erable to other types of towing.
Warning! G
!
!
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equip- on the ground, the gear selector lever
the ground, make certain that the SmartKey
ment, with SmartKey in starter switch must be in position N and the Smart-
is in starter switch position 2.
turned to position 0. Key must be in starter switch
If the SmartKey is left in the starter switch
position 2.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
Towing with sling-type equipment over When towing the vehicle with all wheels
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this
bumpy roads will damage radiator and on the ground, the vehicle may be
case, the steering is locked. To unlock, re-
supports. towed only for distances up to 30 miles
move SmartKey from starter switch and re-
(50 km) and at a speed not to exceed
insert.
To prevent damage during transport,
30 mph (50 km/h).
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
Always tow with a tow bar if:
suspension parts. Use the towing eyes. If the vehicle is towed with one axle
the engine will not run
raised (observe instructions regarding
Switch off the ESP ( page 79),
there is a malfunction in the power sup-
flexible drive shaft and propeller
tow-away alarm ( page 83) and the
ply or in the vehicle s electrical system
shafts), the engine must be shut off
automatic central locking
as that will be necessary to adequately con-
(SmartKey in starter switch position 1).
( page 133).
Otherwise, the 4-ETS may become en- trol the towed vehicle.
gaged which may cause loss of towing
When circumstances do not permit the
control.
recommended towing methods, the vehi-
cle may be towed with all wheels on the
315
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
i !
Warning! G
To signal turns while being towed with When towing the vehicle with all wheels
hazard warning flasher in use, turn on the ground, note the following:
With the engine not running, there is no
SmartKey in starter switch to
With the automatic central locking acti-
power assistance for the brake and steering
position 2 and activate combination
vated and the SmartKey in starter
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
switch for left or right turn signal in usu-
switch position 2, the vehicle doors
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
al manner  only the selected turn sig-
lock if the wheels are turning at vehicle
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve-
nal will operate.
speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or
hicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the haz-
more.
ard warning flasher will operate again.
To prevent the vehicle doors from lock-
i
ing, deactivate the automatic central
The gear selector lever will remain
locking ( page 133).
locked in position P and the SmartKey
will not turn in the starter switch if the
Towing of the vehicle should only be
battery is disconnected or discharged.
done using the towing eye. Never at-
See notes on the battery ( page 311)
tach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to
or on jump starting ( page 313).
vehicle chassis, frame or suspension
parts.
Manually unlocking transmission gear
selector lever ( page 290).
316
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Transporting the vehicle Towing the vehicle - various problem In case of transfer case damage or for
scenarios towing vehicle distances exceeding
When transporting the vehicle, you can use
30 miles (50 km)
the towing eyes for pulling the vehicle onto
!
The propeller shafts to the drive axles must
a trailer or transporter.
When removing drive shaft, place M10
be removed.
Move the gear selector lever to posi- nuts on bolts as distance sleeves and
tion N. tighten using M8 nuts.
In case of front axle damage
Always install new self-locking nuts
Shift the transfer case to neutral posi-
Raise the front axle when towing. The pro-
when reinstalling the drive shaft.
tion N.
peller shaft between the rear axle and the
transfer case must be removed.
To avoid damaging the vehicle, it
Comply with all towing information
should only be tied down on the
( page 315).
In case of rear axle damage
wheels/wheel rims, not on chassis
components such as the transverse
When the rear axle is raised, the vehicle
In case of engine damage, transmission
link or trailing arm.
can only be towed with a wheel lift or a dol-
damage or malfunctions in electrical
ly placed under its front wheels.
equipment
Move the gear selector lever to posi-
tion N.
Shift the transfer case to neutral posi-
tion N.
317
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Front towing eye Rear towing eye Freeing a stranded vehicle
In the front, the towing eye is located on In the rear, the towing eye is located on the Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the
the driver s side under the bumper. driver s side under the bumper. wheels are dug into sand or mud, should
be done with the greatest of care, especial-
ly if the vehicle is heavily loaded.
Avoid pulling the vehicle jerkily or diago-
nally, since it could result in damage to the
chassis alignment.
Never try to free a vehicle that is still cou-
pled to a trailer.
If possible, a vehicle equipped with trailer
hitch receiver should be pulled backward
1 Towing eye 1 Towing eye
in its own previously made tracks.
318
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses
Fuse box in passenger compartment Fuse box in battery box
i
Only install fuses that have been tested
The battery box is located under the cover
and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
Opening
in the rear footwell.
that have the specified amperage rat-
ing. Replacement of fuses can only be per-
formed by a Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Never attempt to repair or bridge a
Center.
blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
The fuse box is located on the left side of
the cockpit in the passenger compart-
ment. It contains:
1 Cover
a fuse chart
Open the driver s door.
spare fuses
Remove cover 1 in direction of ar-
a special spare extractor
rows.
Additional fuses are located in:
battery box
front passenger footwell under the
cockpit
middle tunnel
319
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in front passenger footwell
i
We recommend having the fuses
changed at a Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Opening
5 Fuse box
3 Mounting screw
6 Mounting screw
4 Cover
To make changing the fuses easier, fuse
Unscrew mounting screws 3.
box 5 can be folded down slightly:
Remove cover 4 in direction of
Unscrew mounting screws 6.
arrows.
Fold fuse box 5 downward.
1 Mounting screw
2 Cover
Unscrew mounting screws 1.
Remove cover 2 in direction of ar-
rows.
320
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in middle tunnel Remove both front end stops 1 of the Opening fuse box
front passenger seat tracks with a
screwdriver.
i
We recommend having the fuses Move front passenger seat fully for-
changed at a Mercedes-Benz Light ward.
Truck Center.
!
When reinstalling front passenger seat
Removing front end stops
track stops, place end stops in correct
position. For your safety, maintain
proper spacing 2.
1 Mounting screw
2 Cover
Warning! G
Unscrew mounting screws 1.
Remove cover 2 in direction of ar-
Do not drive the vehicle when the front end
rows.
stops are not correctly installed. Failure to
reinstall stops as indicated may result in se-
rious injury in certain frontal crashes.
Front end stop on the right seat rail, left
seat rail laterally reversed
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard when
1 Front end stop
the seat is occupied. Comply with informa-
2 Spacing
tion on occupant safety ( page 56).
321
322
Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions, vehicle weights and ratings
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Consumer information
323
Technical data
Spare parts service
Spare parts service
The  Technical data section provides the All authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
!
necessary technical data for your vehicle. Centers maintain a stock of genuine
The use of non-genuine Merceds-Benz
Mercedes-Benz parts required for mainte-
parts and accessories not authorized
nance and repair work. In addition, strate-
by Mercedes-Benz could damage the
gically located parts distribution centers
vehicle, which is not covered by the
provide quick and reliable parts service.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
could compromise the vehicle s dura-
More than 300 000 different spare parts
bility or safety.
for Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject-
ed to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, man-
ufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
324
Technical data
Warranty coverage
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are Loss of Service and Warranty
the  warranties printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts Information Booklet
Warranty Information booklet. Your and Accessories warranties, copies of
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck which are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Information booklet, have your authorized
Center will exchange or repair any defec- Light Truck Center.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center arrange
tive parts originally installed in the vehicle
for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
in accordance with the terms of the follow-
ing warranties:
New vehicle limited warranty
Emission system warranty
Emission performance warranty
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont emission control systems
warranty
325
Technical data
Identification labels
Identification labels
When ordering spare parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine numbers.
1 Certification label and Paintwork Num- 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
ber located on the driver s B-pillar (lower edge of windshield)
3 Engine number (engraved on engine)
4 Information label, California version
5 Emission control label
Vacuum line routing for emission con-
trol system
326
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
For dimensions of the poly-V-belt, see G500/G55AMG
technical data ( page 328).
1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 Power steering pump
3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley
327
Technical data
Engine
Engine
G 500 (463.2491) G55AMG (463.246)1
Engine 113 113
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 8 8
Bore 3.82 in (97.00 mm) 3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke 3.31 in (84.00 mm) 3.60 in (92.00 mm)
Total piston displacement 303.0 cu in (4966 cm3) 331.8 cu in (5439 cm3)
Compression ratio 10:1 10.5:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 292 hp/5500 rpm 349 hp/5500 rpm
(218 kW/5500 rpm) (260 kW/5500 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 336 lb-ft/2800 - 4000 rpm 391 lb-ft/3250 rpm
(456 Nm/2800 - 4000 rpm) (530 Nm/3250 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6000 rpm 6000 rpm
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2380 mm 2380 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special
equipment.
328
Technical data
Rims and tires
Rims and tires
Use only tires and rims which have been
! i
specifically developed for your vehicle and
Moreover, tires and rims not approved Further information on tires and rims is
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, ex- available at any authorized
Other tires and rims can have detrimental
hibit dimensional variations and differ- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. A
effects, such as
ent tire deformation characteristics tire inflation pressure table is located
that could cause them to come into on the fuel filler flap of the vehicle. The
poor handling characteristics
contact with the vehicle body or axle tire pressure should be checked regu-
increased noise
parts. This may result in damage to the larly and should only be adjusted on
increased fuel consumption
tires or the vehicle. cold tires. Follow tire manufacturer s
maintenance recommendation includ-
ed with vehicle.
Rims and Tires
G500 G55AMG
Rims (light alloy) 71/2 J x18 H2 91/2 J x 18 EH2
Wheel offset 1.69 in (43 mm) 1.97 in (50 mm)
All season tires (radial-ply tires) 265/60 R18 110V 285/55 R18 113V
329
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheels
G500 G55AMG
Rims (light alloy) 71/2 J x18 H2 81/2 J x18 H2
Wheel offset 1.69 in (43 mm) 1.89 in (48 mm)
All season tires (radial-ply tires) 265/60 R18 110V 265/60 R18 110V M+S
330
Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
G500 G55AMG
Generator (alternator) 14 V/150 A 14 V/150 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW 12 V/1.7 kW
Battery 12 V/90 Ah 12 V/90 Ah
Spark plugs Bosch F 8 DPER NGK PFR5R-11
Beru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 2
Electrode gap 0.039 in (1.0 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Tightening torque 15  22 lb-ft (20  30 Nm) 15  22 lb-ft (20  30 Nm)
331
Technical data
Main dimensions, vehicle weights and ratings
Main dimensions, vehicle weights and ratings
Main dimensions
G500 G55AMG
Overall vehicle length 185.6 in (4715 mm) 185.6 in (4715 mm)
(inc. spare wheel)
Overall vehicle width 71.3 in (1811 mm) 73.4 in (1864 mm)
Overall vehicle height 77.8 in (1977 mm) 77.8 in (1977 mm)
Wheel base 112.2 in (2850 mm) 112.2 in (2850 mm)
Ground clearance 8.3 in (211 mm) 8.3 in (211 mm)
Turning radius 523.6 in (13.3 m) 523.6 in (13.3 m)
Track, front and rear 59.6 in (1515 mm) 59.1 in (1501 mm)
Vehicle weights and ratings
G500 G55AMG
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating1 6615 lbs (3000 kg) 6615 lbs (3000 kg)
Gross Axle Weight Rating, front2 3110 lbs (1410 kg) 3110 lbs (1410 kg)
Gross Axle Weight Rating, rear2 3965 lbs (1800 kg) 3965 lbs (1800 kg)
1
GVWR is the maximum permissible vehicle weight. Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) comprises weight of vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories,
passengers, cargo and trailer tongue. It must never exceed the GVWR.
2
GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight.
332
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Capacities Therefore use only brands tested and ap- Please refer to the Factory Approved Ser-
proved by Mercedes-Benz. vice Products pamphlet, or inquire at your
Vehicle components and their respective
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
lubricants must match.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil filter G500 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engine oils
G55AMG 8.0 US qt (7.5 l)
Automatic transmission 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) MB Automatic Transmission Oil
Transfer case 2.96 US qt (2.8 l) MB part no. A 001 989 28 03 10
Differential lock mechanism 0.47 - 0.63 US qt Brake fluid DOT 3+4, SAE J1703
(0.45 - 0.6 l)
Front axle 1.5 US qt (1.4 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 90, 85 W 90
Rear axle 1.9 US qt (1.8 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 90, 85 W 90
Power steering approx. 1.06 US qt (1.0 l) MB Power Steering Fluid, or
approved Dexron III ATF
Front wheel hubs approx. 1.5 oz (43 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Fuel tank 25.4 US gal (96.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline:
including a reserve of 5.3 US gal (20.0 l) Posted Octane 91
(average of 96 RON/86 MON)
333
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Cooling system approx. 12.7 US qt (12.0 l) MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
Air conditioning system R-134a refrigerant and
special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12)
Windshield/rear window washer system approx. 7.9 US qt (7.5 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
and headlamp cleaning system and water1
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate  S and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate  S and commercially available
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios ( page 339).
Engine oils
! Using engine oils of other specification
may cause the FSS to incorrectly deter-
Always check the oil filler cap
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
mine the next service interval and will
( page 232) for important informa-
suitability in our engines. Therefore, use
result in engine damage not covered by
tion pertaining to the engine oil need-
only engine oils recommended by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
ing to meet a specific Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz. Information on approved
specification (e.g. MB 229.5). If such
engine oils is available in the Factory Ap-
Please follow the FSS and Service Booklet
information is printed on the oil filler
proved Service Products pamphlet, or at
recommendations for scheduled oil chang-
cap, only use an engine oil from the list
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
es. Failure to do so could result in engine
of approved engine oils in the Factory
Truck Center.
damage not covered by the
Approved Service Products pamphlet
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
that meets the specification indicated
on the oil filler cap.
334
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine oil additives Brake fluid Premium unleaded gasoline
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. During vehicle operation, the boiling point
!
They may damage the engine. of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
To maintain the engine s durability and
through the absorption of moisture from
Damage or malfunctions resulting from performance, premium unleaded gaso-
the atmosphere. Under extremely strenu-
blending oil additives are not covered by line must be used. If premium unleaded
ous operating conditions, this moisture
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. is not available and low octane fuel is
content can lead to the formation of bub-
used, follow these precautions:
bles in the system, thus reducing the sys-
Air conditioning refrigerant
Have the fuel tank only partially
tem s efficiency.
filled with unleaded regular and fill
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
Therefore, the brake fluid must be re-
up with premium unleaded as soon
lubricating oil is used in the air condition-
placed every two years, preferably in the
as possible.
ing system.
spring.
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lu-
Only brake fluid approved by
acceleration.
bricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your au-
system will occur. Do not exceed an engine speed of
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
ter will provide you with additional
with a light load such as two per-
information.
sons and no luggage.
Do not exceed 2D 3 of maximum ac-
celerator pedal position if the vehi-
cle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.
335
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Fuel requirements Gasoline additives Damage or malfunctions resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending specific
Use only premium unleaded meeting A major concern among engine manufac-
fuel additives are not covered by the
ASTM standard D 439: turers is carbon build-up caused by gaso-
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
line. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
The octane number (posted at the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
Coolants
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
that prevent the build up of carbon depos-
of both the Research (R) octane num-
its. The engine coolant is a mixture of water
ber and the Motor (M) octane number:
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which pro-
(R+M)/2). This is also known as the After an extended period of using fuels
vides:
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves Corrosion protection
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
and in the combustion area, leading to en-
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be Freeze protection
gine performance problems such as:
used provided the ratio of any one of these
Boiling protection (by increasing the
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed Warm-up hesitation
boiling point)
10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
Unstable idle
The cooling system was filled at the factory
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
Knocking/pinging with a coolant providing freeze protection
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
to approximately -35�F (-37�C) and corro-
Misfire
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is sion protection.
Power loss
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
Do not blend other specific fuel additives
-22�F (-30�C), the boiling point of the cool-
used.
with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
ant in the pressurized cooling system is
cost and may be harmful to the engine op-
These blends must also meet all other fuel reached at approximately 266�F (130�C).
eration.
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
336
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
The coolant solution must be used year If the coolant level is low, water and MB Anticorrosion/antifreeze
round to provide the necessary corrosion anticorrosion/antifreeze should be used
Your vehicle contains a number of alumi-
protection and increase in the boil-over to bring it up to the proper level (have cool-
num parts. The use of aluminum compo-
protection. Refer to Service Booklet for re- ing system checked for signs of leakage).
nents in motor vehicle engines
placement interval. Please make sure the mixture is in accor-
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
dance with label instructions.
To provide important corrosion protection,
coolant used in such engines be specifical-
the solution must be at least 45% anticor- The water in the cooling system must meet
ly formulated to protect the aluminum
rosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze minimum requirements, which are usually
parts. (Failure to use such anticorro-
protection to approx. - 22�F [-30�C]). satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
sion/antifreeze coolant will result in a sig-
If you use a solution that is more than 55% are not sure about the water quality, con-
nificantly shortened service life.)
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protec- sult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Therefore, the following product is strongly
tion to approx. - 49�F [-45�C]), the engine Truck Center.
recommended for use in your vehicle:
temperature will increase due to the lower
Mercedes-Benz anticorrosion/antifreeze
heat transfer capability of the solution.
agent.
Therefore, do not use more than this
amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
337
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Before the start of the winter season (or regularly checked each time you bring your
once a year in hot southern regions), you vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze Light Truck Center for service.
concentration checked. The coolant is also
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model Approx. freeze protection
 35�F ( 37�C)  49�F ( 45�C)
G500/ 6.35 US qt (6.0 l) 7.0 US qt (6.6 l)
G55AMG
338
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Windshield/rear window washer sys- Washer fluid mixing ratio
Warning! G
tem and headlamp cleaning system
For temperatures above freezing point use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate  S
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-
The windshield washer reservoir is located
and water:
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
in the engine compartment on the front
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
1 part  S to 100 parts water
passenger side. It holds approximately
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
5.3 US qt (5.0 l). The headlamp cleaning
[40 ml  S to 1 gallon (4 liters) water]
system is also supplied from the wind-
For temperatures below freezing point use
shield washer reservoir.
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate  S
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
and commercially available premixed
Washer Concentrate  S to and water
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
(or concentrate and commercially
1 part  S to 100 parts solvent
available premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze, depending on am-
[40 ml  S to 1 gallon (4 liters) solvent]
bient temperatures) ( page 339).
339
Technical data
Consumer information
Consumer information
This has been prepared as required of all Tread wear Traction
manufacturers of passenger cars under Ti-
The tread wear grade is a comparative rat- The traction grades, from highest to lowest
tle 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-
Part 575 pursuant to the  National Traffic
tested under controlled conditions on a sent the tire s ability to stop on wet pave-
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 .
specified government test course. For ex- ment as measured under controlled
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one conditions on specified government test
Uniform tire quality grading
and one-half (11D 2) times as well on the surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
government course as a tire graded 100. marked C may have poor traction perfor-
Quality grades can be found, where appli-
The relative performance of tires depends mance.
cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
upon the actual conditions of their use,
shoulder and maximum section width. For
however, and may depart significantly
example: Warning! G
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
Tread wear Traction Temperature The traction grade assigned to this tire is
road characteristics and climate.
based on straight ahead braking traction
200 AA A
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
All passenger car tires must conform to
characteristics.
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
340
Technical data
Consumer information
Temperature
Warning! G
The temperature grades are A (the high-
est), B, and C, representing the tire s resis-
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
tance to the generation of heat and its
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
flation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-
rately or in combination, can cause
perature can cause the material of the tire
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-
failure.
cessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
341
342
Technical terms
ABS BAS COMAND
(Antilock Brake System) (Brake Assist System) (Cockpit Management and Data Sys-
Prevents the wheels from locking up System for potentially reducing braking tem)
during braking so that the vehicle can distances in emergency braking situa- Information and operating center for
continue to be steered. tions. The system is activated when it vehicle sound and communications
senses an emergency based on how systems, including the radio and the
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
fast the brake is applied. navigation system, as well as other op-
system
tional equipment (CD changer, tele-
This system detects if a special system CAC
phone, etc.).
compatible child restraint seat is in- (Customer Assistance Center)
stalled on the front passenger seat. The Mercedes-Benz customer service cen- Control system
system will automatically deactivate ter, which can help you with any ques- The control system is used to call up
the passenger front airbag when such a tions about your vehicle and provide vehicle information and to change
seat is properly installed (indicator assistance in the event of a break- component settings. Information and
lamp 7 in the center console down. messages appear in the multifunction
comes on). See your authorized display. The driver uses the buttons on
CAN system
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the multifunction steering wheel to
(Controller Area Network)
availability. navigate through the system and to ad-
Data bus network serving to control ve-
just settings.
BabySmartTM compatible child seats hicle functions such as door locking or
Special restraint system for children. windshield wiping.
The sensor system for the passenger
Cockpit
seat prevents deployment of the pas-
All instruments, switches, buttons and
senger front airbag if a BabySmartTM
indicator/warning lamps in the passen-
compatible child seat is installed.
ger compartment needed for vehicle
operation and monitoring.
343
Technical terms
Differential locks ESP GVW
On slippery surfaces, differential locks (Electronic Stability Program) (Gross Vehicle Weight)
prevent one wheel of an axle from spin- Improves vehicle handling and direc- The GVW comprises the weight of the
ning while the other wheel stands still, tional stability. vehicle including fuel, tools, spare
resulting in driving force no longer be- wheel, installed accessories, passen-
ETD
ing transferred. gers and cargo. The GWV must never
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
exceed the GVWR indicated on the cer-
Cruise control Device which deploys in certain frontal
tification label located on the driver s
Driving convenience system for auto- and rear collisions exceeding the sys-
door pillar.
matically maintaining the vehicle speed tem's threshold to tighten the seat
set by the driver. belts. GVWR
->SRS (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
Engine number
This is the maximum permissible vehi-
The number set by the manufacturer FSS
cle weight. It is indicated on certifica-
and placed on the cylinder block to (Flexible Service System)
tion label located on the driver s door
uniquely identify each engine pro- Service indicator in the speedometer
pillar.
duced. display that informs the driver when
the next vehicle maintenance service is Gear range
Engine oil viscosity
due. Number of gears which are available to
Measurement for the inner friction (vis-
the automatic transmission for shifting.
cosity) of the oil at different tempera- GAWR
The automatic gear shifting process
tures. The higher the temperature an (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
can be adapted to specific operating
oil can tolerate without becoming thin, The GAWR is the maximum permissible
conditions using the gear selector le-
or the lower the temperature it can tol- axle weight. The gross vehicle weight
ver.
erate without becoming viscous, the on each axle must never exceed the
better the viscosity. GAWR for the front and rear axle indi-
cated on the certification label located
on the driver s door pillar.
344
Technical terms
GPS Lock button MON
(Global Positioning System) Button on the door which indicates (Motor Octane Number)
Satellite-based system for relaying whether the door is locked or un- The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
geographic location information to and locked. Pushing the lock button down as determined by a standardized meth-
from vehicles equipped with special re- on an individual door from inside will od. It is an indication of a gasoline's
ceivers. Employs CD digital maps for lock that door. ability to resist undesired detonation
navigation. (knocking). The average of both the
Memory function*
MON (Motor Octane Number) and
Instrument cluster Used to store three individual seat,
->RON (Research Octane Number) is
The displays and indicator/warning steering wheel and mirror positions for
posted at the pump, also known as
lamps in the driver s field of vision, in- each key.
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
cluding the tachometer, speedometer,
Menu
engine temperature and fuel gauge. Multifunction display
The control system displays are ar-
A display field in the instrument cluster
Kickdown ranged in menus. Each menu contains
used to present information provided
Depressing the accelerator past the a number of commands for particular
by the control system.
point of resistance shifts the transmis- systems. In the Audio menu, for exam-
sion down to the lowest possible gear. ple, you will find the commands Select Overspeed range
This very quickly accelerates the vehi- radio station or Operate CD player. Engine speeds within the red marking
cle and should not be used for normal Using commands, you can directly of the tachometer dial. Avoid this en-
acceleration needs. change the settings for your vehicle. gine speed range, as it may result in se-
rious engine damage that is not
Line of fall
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
The direct line that an object moves
Warranty.
downhill when influenced by the force
of gravity alone.
345
Technical terms
Poly-V-belt drive Remote Vehicle Diagnostics RON
Drives engine-components (alternator, Transmission of vehicle data and cur- (Research Octane Number)
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine. rent location to the Mercedes-Benz The Research Octane Number for gaso-
Customer Assistance Center for sub- line as determined by a standardized
Power train
scribers to Tele Aid service. method. It is an indication of a gaso-
Collective term designating all compo-
line s ability to resist undesired detona-
nents used to generate and transmit REST
tion (knocking). The average of both
motive power to the drive axles, includ- (Residual engine heat utilization)
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
ing Feature that uses the engine heat
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
stored in the coolant to heat the vehi-
engine
posted at the pump, also known as
cle interior for a short time after the en-
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
clutch/torque converter
gine has been turned off.
Shift lock
transmission
Restraint system
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
Seat belts, belt tensioner, airbags and
transfer case
prevents the transmission gear selec-
child seat restraint systems. As inde-
tor lever from being moved out of
drive shaft
pendent systems, their protective func-
position P without key turned and
tions complement one another.
differential
brake pedal depressed.
axle shafts/axles
SRS
Rear Parking Assist*
(Supplemental Restraint System)
System which uses visual and acoustic
Seat belts, emergency tensioning de-
signals to assist the driver during park-
vice and airbags. Though independent
ing maneuvers.
systems, they are closely interfaced to
provide effective occupant protection.
346
Technical terms
Tele Aid System Tire speed rating VIN
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Part of tire designation; indicates the (Vehicle Identification Number)
Demand) speed range for which a tire is ap- The number set by the manufacturer
The Tele Aid system consists of three proved. and placed on the body to uniquely
types of response: automatic and man- identify each vehicle produced.
Traction
ual emergency, roadside assistance
Force exerted by the vehicle on the Voice control system*
and information. Tele Aid is initially ac-
road via the tires. Voice control system for car phones,
tivated by completing a subscriber
portable cell phones and audio sys-
Transfer case
agreement and placing an acquain-
tems (radio, CD, etc.).
Speed of rotation/torque converter
tance call.
that works together with the ->auto-
The Tele Aid system is operational pro-
matic transmission. In the LOW mode
vided that the vehicle s battery is
off-road position, the transfer case de-
charged, properly connected, not dam-
creases the output rotational speed of
aged and cellular and GPS coverage is
the ->automatic transmission by ap-
available.
proximately half. This results in a corre-
Telematics*
sponding increase of torque on the
A combination of the terms  telecom-
drive axles.
munications and  informatics .
The vehicle then has nearly double the
Tightening torque
driving force but drives only approxi-
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
mately half as fast.
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
347
348
Index
A Hazard warning flasher 108 Interior rear view mirror 38
ABS 25, 74, 343 Headlamps 46 Mirrors 38
LOW RANGE mode 75 High beams 108 Multicontour seat* 97
Malfunction indicator lamp 252, 253 Ignition 33 Seat cushion length 97
Messages in display 261 Rear fog lamp 106 Seat cushion tilt 36
Warning lamp 252, 253 Rear window defroster 155 Seat fore and aft adjustment 35
Accelerator position, automatic Windshield wipers 47 Seat height 36
transmission 144 Adding Seats 34
Accident Coolant 233 Steering column in/out 37
In case of 50 Engine oil 231 Steering column up/down 37
Activating Additional turn signals 295 Steering wheel 37
Air conditioning (cooling) 162 Adjusting 34 Air conditioning (cooling)
Air recirculation mode 160 Air distribution 159 Turning off 162
Anti-theft alarm system 82 Air volume 159 Turning on 162
Central locking (control system) 133 Backrest tilt 36 Air conditioning refrigerant 335
Defrost 160 Exterior rear view mirror 38 Air distribution
Easy-entry/exit feature 133 Head restraint height 36 Adjusting 159
ESP 81 Head restraint height, rear seats 96 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure
Exterior headlamps 46 Head restraint tilt 36 Air recirculation mode 160
Exterior lamps 105 Instrument cluster illumination 112 Activating 160
Exterior rear view mirror parking Deactivating 161
position 153
349
Index
Air volume Canceling alarm 83 Automatic lighting control
Adjusting 159 Disarming 83 Activating 109
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 259 Anti-theft systems 82 Deactivating 109
Airbags 57 Anti-theft alarm system 82 Automatic locking when driving 91
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation Tow-away alarm 83 Automatic transmission 140
system 68, 343 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning Accelerator position 144
Front 61 Armrest Emergency operation (Limp Home
Safety guidelines 60 Storage compartment below 184 Mode) 144
Alarm Storage compartment in front of 184 Fluid level 232
Audible 73, 82 Ashtrays 186 Gear ranges 142
Canceling 83, 84 At the gas station 224 Gear selector lever position 140, 142
Visual 82 ATF (automatic transmission fluid) 232 Gear shifting malfunctions 144
Alarm system AUDIO menu 120 Kickdown 144
Anti-theft 82 Selecting radio station 121 Manual shifting 141
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 337 Automatic antiglare for rear view One-touch gearshifting 141
Antiglare mirror 152 Transmission fluid 232
Automatic 152 Automatic central locking
B
Antilock brake system (ABS) 343 Activating/deactivating (control
BabySmartTM
Anti-theft alarm system system) 133
Airbag deactivation system 68, 343
Arming 82 Automatic climate control
Compatible child seats 68, 343
Deactivating 162
Self-test 68
Automatic headlamp mode 105
350
Index
Backup lamps 296 B-pillar 326 High and low beam 297
Bulbs 296 Brake assist system (BAS) 343 High beam lamps 295
Replacing bulbs 302 Brake fluid 225, 335 High mounted brake lamp 296
BAS 74, 76, 343 Brake lamp bulbs, left and right 296 License plate lamps 296, 303
Messages in display 261 Brake lamp, high mounted 296 Low beam lamps 295
Batteries, SmartKey Brake pads Parking lamps 295, 296, 297
Changing 288 Message in display 266 Rear fog lamp 296, 302
Check lamp 87 Brakes 208 Rear turn signal lamps 296
Checking 88 Warning lamp 254, 255 Side marker lamps 295, 300
Battery box Break-in period 206 Standing lamps 295, 296, 297
Fuse box in 319 Brush guard* 293 Tail lamp assemblies 296, 301
Battery discharged Lowering 294
C
Jump starting 313 Raising and securing 294
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 343
Battery, vehicle 235, 311 Bulbs, replacing
Calling up
Charging 311 Additional turn signals 295
Range (distance to empty) 137
Disconnecting 312 Backup lamps 296, 302
Service indicator 243
Messages in display 265, 266 Brake lamps 296, 302
CAN system 343
Reconnecting 312 Front fog lamps 295, 299
Capacities
Block heater 240 Front lamps 295
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 333
Blocking rear door window operation 71 Front turn signal lamps 295, 300
Cargo area see Cargo compartment
351
Index
Cargo compartment Switching on/off (control Child safety switch see Blocking of rear
Tailgate 89, 90 system) 133 door window operation
Tie-down rings 182 Unlocking from inside 92 Cigarette lighter 188
Cargo compartment cover 175 Certification label 326 Cleaning
Installing 176 Changing Cup holders 248
Removing 176 Batteries (SmartKey) 288 Gear selector lever 248
Cargo tie-down rings 182 Key setting 133 Hard plastic trim items 248
Catalytic converter 222 Charging Headlamps 153
CD changer 284 Vehicle battery 311 Headliner 248
CD player CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator Illuminated door sill panels 249
Operating 121 lamp 256 Instrument cluster 248
Center console 27 Checking Leather upholstery 249
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 259 Coolant level 225, 232 Light alloy wheels 248
Lower part 28 Oil level 226, 228 MB Tex upholstery 249
Upper part 27 Checklist Plastic and rubber parts 249
Centigrade Off-road driving 215 Rear Parking Assist sensors* 247
Setting temperature units 127 Child safety 65 Seat belts 248
Central locking Infant and child restraint systems 56, Steering wheel 248
From inside 92 62, 66 Windows 247
Switch 92 LATCH child seat anchors 70 Windshield 48
Wiper blades 247
Wood trims 249
352
Index
Climate control 156 Combination switch 23, 107, 108 Submenus 117, 119
Adjusting 159, 160 High beam flasher 47, 108 TEL menu 137
Defogging windshield 160 Turn signals 46 Trip computer menu 136
Defrosting 160 Windshield wipers 47 Vehicle submenu 132
Rear window defroster 155 Control and operation of radio Convenience feature 165
Setting the temperature 158 transmitters 221 Convenience submenu 133
Clock 25 Control system 115, 343 Activating easy-entry/exit
Closing AUDIO menu 120 feature 133
Glove box 183 Convenience submenu 133 Setting key-dependency 135
Hood 228 Display digital speedometer 120 Setting parking position for exterior
Side windows 164 Functions 116, 119 rear view mirror 135
Sliding/pop-up roof 166, 292 Instrument cluster submenu 127 Coolant 232, 336
Sliding/pop-up roof with Lighting submenu 129 Adding 233
SmartKey 167 Malfunction memory menu 122 Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Tailgate 90 Menus 118, 119, 345 quantity 337
Windows 164 Multifunction display 115 Capacities 333
Windows with SmartKey 165 Multifunction steering wheel 116 Checking level 232
Closing sliding/pop-up roof NAVI menu 122 Messages in display 268, 269
In an emergency 292 Selecting radio system 121 Temperature 223
Cockpit 22, 343 Settings menu 123 Temperature display 112
Cockpit management and data system Standard display menu 120 Warning lamp 268
(COMAND) 343 Coolant level
COMAND 343 Checking 225, 232
COMAND see separate operating instruc-
tions
353
Index
Crossing obstacles 218 D Defogging
Cruise control 169, 344 Daytime running lamp mode 106 Windshield 160
Canceling 170 Setting 129 Defrosting 160
Driving downhill 170 Deactivating Delayed switch-off
Driving uphill 170 Air conditioning (cooling) 162 Exterior lamps 131
Fine adjustment 171 Air recirculation mode 161 Interior lighting 132
Setting current speed 170 Alarm 83 Dialing
Setting speed 171 Anti-theft alarm system 83 A number (telephone) 139
Cruise control lever 169 Central locking (control system) 133 Differential locks 148, 344
Cup holder Cruise control 170 Switching off 151
In rear passenger footwell 186 Defrost 160 Switching on 150
Cup holders 185 ESP 79 Difficulties
Cleaning 248 Exterior lamps 105 While driving see Problems while driv-
In front passenger footwell 185 Exterior lamps delayed ing
Next to the armrest 185 switch-off 131 With starting 44
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 343 Hazard warning flasher 108 Digital speedometer 120
Headlamps 52 Direction of rotation (tires) 237
Immobilizer 82 Discharged battery
Interior lighting delayed Jump starting 313
switch-off 132 Disconnecting
Rear window defroster 155 Vehicle battery 312
Tow-away alarm 84 Display
Deep water see Standing water Selecting 129
354
Index
Displays Downshifting 141 Driving systems 169
Digital speedometer 120 Drink holders see Cup holders Cruise control 169
Messages 229, 260 Drinking and driving 207 Driving safety systems 74
Selecting 129 Driving Driving through water 217
Service indicator 242 General instructions 40, 207
E
Showing malfunctions 122 In winter 212
Easy-entry/exit feature 94
Distance to empty (range) Problems 50
Activating 133
Calling up 136 Safety systems 74
Interrupting movement 134
Door control panel 30 Through standing water 213
EBB 74, 78
Door handle 30 Driving abroad 222
Electrical fuses 319
Door sill panels Driving and safety systems
Electrical outlet 188
Cleaning 249 4-ETS 77
Electrical system
Door unlock ABS 74
Technical data 331
With Tele Aid 197 BAS 76
Electronic Brake Booster (EBB) 78
Doors EBB 78
Electronic Stability Program see ESP
Message in display 271 ESP 78
Electronic Stability program see ESP
Opening from the inside 89 Driving instruction
Electronic Traction System (ETS) 77
Opening from the outside 87 Passenger compartment 213
Emergency call system 190
Downhill driving Driving instructions 207
Emergency calls
Cruise control 170 Driving off 209
Initiating an emergency call 193
With Tele Aid 191
355
Index
Emergency operation (Limp Home Engine compartment 227 ETD 56, 65, 344
Mode) 144 Hood 227 Safety guidelines 60
Emergency operations Engine malfunction indicator lamp 25, Exterior lamp switch 104
Closing sliding/pop-up roof 292 256 Exterior lamps
Locking the vehicle 288 Engine number 344 Delayed switch-off 131
Opening sliding/pop-up roof 292 Engine oil 228, 334 Exterior rear view mirrors
Remote door unlock 197 Adding 231 Adjusting 38
Unlocking the tailgate 287 Additives 335, 340 Parking position for 135
Unlocking the vehicle 287 Checking level 228
F
Emergency tensioning device see ETD Consumption 228
Fahrenheit
Emission control 222 Display messages 272
Setting temperature units 127
Emission control label 326 Messages in display 229, 271
Fastening the seat belts 40
Ending Oil dipstick 232
Fine adjustment
A call (telephone) 138 Viscosity 344
Cruise control 171
Engine Engine oil level see Oil level
First aid kit 283
Compartment 227 Enlarged cargo compartment 176
Flat tire 306
Message in display 256 ESP 25, 74, 78, 344
Lowering the vehicle 310
Starting with the key 44 Messages in display 263
Mounting the spare wheel 307
Technical data 328 Switching off 79
Spare wheel 285
Turning off with the key 52 Switching on 81
Engine cleaning 246 Synchronizing 263
Warning lamp 257
356
Index
Flexible Service System (FSS) 242, 344 FSS (Flexible Service System) 242, 344 Fuel reserve tank
Fog lamp, rear 107, 296 Fuel 225 Message in display 273
Fog lamps, front 107 Additives 336 Fuel tank
Messages in display 275 Fuel reserve warning lamp 258 Capacity 333
Switching on 107 Gasoline additives 336 Filler flap 224
4-ETS 74, 77 Premium unleaded gasoline 225, Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Front airbags 61 333, 335 Capacities 333
Front axle differential lock Refueling 224 Functions (control system) 116, 119
Switching on 151 Requirements 336 Resetting 125
Front fog lamps Reserve warning 25 Fuse box 319, 320, 321
Replacing bulbs 295, 299 Technical data 333 Fuses 319
Front lamps Fuel additives 336 Fuse box in battery box 319
Messages in display 274, 276 Fuel consumption statistics Fuse box in front passenger
Replacing bulbs 295, 297 After start 136 footwell 320
Switching on 104 Since last reset 136 Fuse box in middle tunnel 321
Front seat head restraints Fuel filler flap 224 Fuse box in passenger
Installing 95 Locking 224 compartment 319
Removing 95 Opening 290
G
Front towing eye 318 Unlocking 224
Garage door opener 29, 198
Front turn signal lamp Fuel requirements 336
Gasoline see Fuel
Replacing bulbs 300
Gasoline additives 336
GAWR 344
357
Index
Gear range 344 H Headlight switch-off delay see Delayed
Automatic transmission 142 Hard plastic trim items switch-off, exterior lamps
Limiting 142 Cleaning 248 Headliner
Shifting into optimal 141 Hazard warning flasher 108 Cleaning 248
Transfer case 145 Switching off 108 Heated seats 98
Gear range limit Switching on 108 Heated steering wheel 203
Canceling 141 Head restraints 95 Height adjustment
Gear selector lever Power seats 36 Head restraints 36
Cleaning 248 Synchronizing 95 Seat belts 42
Position 142 Headlamp cleaning system 234 Steering wheel 37
Position (automatic Headlamps High beam flasher 47, 108
transmission) 140 Automatic control 105 High beam headlamps
Global Cleaning 246 Messages in display 275
Locking 87 Cleaning system 153, 234 Replacing bulbs 295, 297
Unlocking 87 Switching off 52 Switching on 108
Global Positioning System (GPS) 345 Switching on 46 High mounted brake lamp 296
Glove box 23, 183 Washer fluid 339 Hood 227
Closing 183 Washer system 339 Closing 228
Opening 183 Messages in display 273
Good visibility 152 Opening 227
GPS 345 Hydroplaning 210
GVW 344
GVWR 344
358
Index
I Instrument cluster 24, 112, 345 Interval wiping 49
Identification labels 326 Cleaning 248 Switching off 49
Certification label 326 Coolant temperature display 112 Switching on 49
Vehicle identification number Illumination 112
J
(VIN) 326 Lamps in 258
Jack 283, 284
Ignition 33 Multifunction display 115
Jump starting 313
Switching on 44 Outside temperature indicator 114
Immobilizer 82 Selecting language 128 K
Activating 82 Instrument lighting 112 Key positions in starter switch 33
Deactivating 82 Instruments and controls see Cockpit Key, mechanical 287
Infant and child restraint systems 66 Interior lighting 109 Key, SmartKey
Installing 69 Activating automatic control 109 Battery check lamp 87
LATCH child seat anchors 70 Deactivating automatic control 109 Changing the batteries 288
Information Delayed switch-off 132 Checking the batteries 88
Button for Tele Aid 194 Manual operation 109 Factory setting 87
Inside rear view mirror Interior rear view mirror Global locking 87
Antiglare 152 Adjusting 38 Global unlocking 87
Installing Interior storage spaces 183 Loss of 88
Cargo compartment cover 176 Cup holders 185, 186 Positions in starter switch 33
Infant and child restraint systems 69 Glove box 183 Remote controls 86
Wiper blades 305 Parcel net in front passenger Restoring to factory setting 87
Instructions footwell 186 Selective setting 87
Loading 180 Storage compartment below Starting the engine 44
armrest 184 Unlocking with 32
Storage compartment in front of Key-dependency memory
armrest 184 Settings 135
359
Index
Keys 86 Language Interior 109
Kickdown 144, 345 Multifunction display 128 Locator lighting 106
Kilometers/miles in speedometer 128 Setting 128 Low beams 104
Km/h or mph in speedometer 128 LATCH child seat anchors 70 Manual headlamp mode 105
Layout of poly-V-belt drive 327 Night security illumination 106
L
Leather upholstery Parking lamps 104
Labels, identification 326
Cleaning 249 Rear fog lamp 107
Lamp bulbs, exterior 295
License plate lamps Settings (control system) 129
Lamps, exterior
Messages in display 276 Limiting the gear range 142
Front 295
Replacing bulbs 296, 303 Limp Home Mode 144
Light sensor 276
Light alloy wheels Line of fall 345
Messages in display 274, 276
Cleaning 248 Loading 175
Rear 296
Technical data 329, 330 Cargo compartment cover 175
Replacing bulbs for rear 301
Light sensor 276 Cargo tie-down rings 182
Lamps, indicator and warning
Lighter see Cigarette lighter Instructions 180
ABS 252, 253
Lighting 104 Partition net* 178
Battery (SmartKey) 87
Automatic headlamp mode 105 Roof rack 175
Brakes 254, 255
Combination switch 108 Split rear bench seat 176
CHECK ENGINE 256
Daytime running lamp mode 106 Locator lighting 106
Engine diagnostics 256
Exterior lamp switch 104 Setting 130
ESP 257
Front fog lamps 107
Fuel reserve 258
High beam flasher 108
Instrument cluster 258
High beams 108
Seat belts 258
Instrument cluster illumination 112
Service indicator 242
SRS 57
Turn signals 25
360
Index
Lock button 345 Malfunction Storing exterior rear view mirror park-
Locking 51, 86 Displaying 122 ing positions 103
Fuel filler flap 224 Rear Parking Assist* 174 Storing key dependent settings 102
Global, SmartKey 87 Malfunction memory 122 Menus 116
Separately the tailgate 90 Calling up 122 AUDIO 120
Vehicle in an emergency 288 Clearing 123 Control system 345
Loss of keys 88 Manual headlamp mode 105 In control system 118, 119
Loss of Service and Warranty Information Manual operations Malfunction memory 122
Booklet 325 Fuel filler flap 290 NAVI 122
Low beam headlamps Interior lighting control 109 Settings menu 123
Messages in display 276 Locking the tailgate 90 Standard display 120
Replacing bulbs 295, 297 Locking the vehicle 288 Submenus 117
LOW RANGE - ABS 75 Sliding/pop-up roof 292 TEL 137
Lowering Unlocking the driver s door 287 Trip computer 136
Vehicle 310 Unlocking the tailgate 91, 287 Messages in the multifunction display
Lubricants Unlocking transmission gear selector Symbol messages 265
Technical data 333 lever 290 Text messages 261
MB Tex upholstery Middle tunnel
M
Cleaning 249 Fuse box in 321
Main dimensions 332
Mechanical key 287 Miles/kilometers in speedometer
Maintenance 242
Memory function 101, 345 Setting 128
Recalling positions from
memory 102
361
Index
Mirrors Multifunction display messages N
Activating exterior rear view mirror ABS 261 Navigation system
parking position 153 BAS 261 Operating 122
Adjusting 38 Battery 265, 266 See separate COMAND operating in-
Automatic antiglare for rear view Brake fluid 266 structions
mirror 152 Brake pads 266 Night security illumination 106
Exterior rear view mirror 38 Check engine 256 Setting 131
Exterior rear view mirror parking Coolant 268, 269
O
positions 135 Display 282
Occupant safety 56
Interior rear view mirror 38 Doors 271
Airbags 57
Storing exterior rear view mirror park- Engine 256
Children in the vehicle 65
ing position 103 Engine oil level 271
Fastening the seat belt 40
MON 225 ESP 263
Infant and child restraint systems 66
MON (Motor Octane Number) 345 Fuel reserve tank 273
LATCH child seat anchors 70
Monitoring reach Hood 273
Seat belts 40, 60
Rear Parking Assist* 173 Key 273
Odometer, main 25
Mph or km/h in speedometer Lamps 274, 276
Off-road driving 213
setting 128 Parking brake 267
Checklist 215
Multicontour seat* 97 Sunroof 281
Crossing obstacles 218
Multifunction display 115, 345 Tailgate 282
Driving through water 217
Selecting language 128 Tele Aid 281
Returning 220
Standard display 119 Telephone* 281
Rules 214
Washer fluid 282
Special driving features 214
Multifunction steering wheel 26, 116
Steep terrain 216
Buttons 116
362
Index
Oil Sliding/pop-up roof in an P
Adding 231 emergency 292 Paintwork 245
Consumption 228 Sliding/pop-up roof with Panic alarm 73
Dipstick 228 SmartKey 167 Panic button on SmartKey 73
Oil dipstick 232 Tailgate 89, 90 Parcel net
Viscosity 344 Windows 164 In front passenger footwell 186
Oil level Windows with SmartKey 165 Parking 51, 209
Checking 226 Operating Parking brake 44, 51
One-touch gearshifting 141 CD player 121 Engaging 51
Canceling gear range limit 141 COMAND see separate operating in- Message in display 267
Downshifting 141 structions Releasing 44
Upshifting 141 Navigation system 122 Parking lamp, front
Opening Radio 121 Replacing bulbs 297
Ashtray 186 Radio transmitters 221 Parking lamps
Doors from the inside 89 Telephone 137 Replacing bulbs 295, 296
Fuel filler flap 224 Operator s Manual 10 Switching on 104
Fuel filler flap manually 290 Ornamental moldings 246 Parking position
Glove box 183 Outside temperature indicator 114 Exterior rear view mirrors 103, 135,
Hood 227 Overdue service 242 153
Side windows 164 Overhead control panel 29 Parktronic see Rear Parking Assist*
Sliding/pop-up roof 166, 292 Overspeed range 345 Partition net* 178
Installing behind front seats 179
Installing behind rear seat bench 178
Removing 180
Parts see Spare parts service
363
Index
Passenger compartment 213 Power assistance 208 Premium unleaded gasoline 335
Fuse box in 319 Power seat Problems
Interior lighting 109 Adjusting backrest tilt 36 While driving 50
Interior rear view mirror 38 Adjusting head restraint height 36 Product information 9
Parcel net in front passenger Adjusting head restraint tilt 36
Q
footwell 186 Adjusting seat cushion tilt 36
Quick search
Passenger footwell Adjusting seat height 36
Phone book 139
Fuse box in 320 Seat fore and aft adjustment 35
Passenger safety see Occupant safety Power train 346 R
Pedals 207 Power windows 164 Radio
Phone book Blocking of rear door window Selecting stations 121
Loading 139 operation 71 Station search 121
Quick search 139 Convenience feature 165 Station selection setting 132
Phone number Side windows 164 Radio transmitters, control and
Dialing 139 Summer opening feature 165 operation 221
Redialing 139 Power-washer 245 Range (distance to empty)
Plastic and rubber parts Practical hints Calling up 137
Cleaning 249 First aid kit 283 Range of sensor
Poly-V-belt drive 346 Fuses 319 Rear Parking Assist* 173
Layout 327 Lamp in center console 259 Reading lamp 29
Positions (Memory function) Lamps in instrument cluster 252 Rear axle differential lock
Recalling from memory 102 Messages in the display 260 Switching on 151
Storing into memory 102 Spare wheel 285 Rear bench seat
Towing the vehicle 315 Foldable 176
Vehicle jack 284 Rear door window
Vehicle tool kit 283 Blocking operation 71
364
Index
Rear fog lamp Refrigerant Resetting
Replacing bulbs 302 Air conditioning 335 All functions (control system) 123
Switching on 107 Refueling 224 All functions of a submenu 125
Rear lamps see Tail lamps Regular checks 225 Fuel consumption 136
Rear Parking Assist* 172, 346 Remote controls Service indicator (FSS) 243
Cleaning sensors 247 SmartKey 86 Trip odometer 113
Malfunction 174 Remote door unlock Residual heat utilization 346
Monitoring reach 173 With Tele Aid 197 REST (Residual engine heat
Warning indicators 174 Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 346 utilization) 346
Rear seat head restraints 96 Removing Restraint systems 56, 346
Installing 96 Cargo compartment cover 176 Airbags 56
Removing 96 Wheel 309 Child seat recognition 56
Rear towing eye 318 Wiper blades 304 Child seats 56
Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 152 Replacing Emergency Tensioning Device
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Brake lamp bulbs 296 (ETD) 56
Rear window defroster 155 Bulbs 295 Lower anchors and tethers for children
Activating 155 Front lamp bulbs 297 (LATCH) 56
Deactivating 155 Rear lamp bulbs 296, 301 Seat belts 56
Rear window wiper/washer 49 Wiper blades 304 Restraint systems see Infant and child re-
Reconnecting straint systems
Vehicle battery 312 Returning from off-road driving 220
Rims 329
Roadside Assistance
Tele Aid 193
365
Index
RON 225 Seat belt height adjustment 42 Selector lever 25
RON (Research Octane Number) 346 Seat belts 56, 62 Lock 43
Roof rack 175 Cleaning 248 Position (automatic transmission) 25
Rotating wheels 238 Fastening 40 Self-test
Rubber parts Height adjustment 42 BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
Cleaning 249 Proper use of 42, 64 system 68
Safety guidelines 60 Tele Aid 191
S
Warning lamp 258 Service
Safety
Seat bench Calling up the service indicator 243
Occupant 56
Folding forward 177 Major service (Service B) 242
Safety belts see Seat belts
Returning to sitting position 177 Minor service (Service A) 242
Safety systems
Seat cushion length Overdue 242
Driving 74
Adjusting 97 Spare parts 324
Searching
Seats 94 Types 242
Radio station 121
Adjusting 34 When due 242
Seat adjustment
Easy entry/exit feature 94 Service and Warranty Booklet
Synchronizing 95
Heater 98 Loss of 325
Seat backrest
Multicontour seat* 97 Service indicator 242
Folding forward 177
Split rear bench seat 176 Calling up 243
Returning to sitting position 177
Selecting Clearing 242, 243
Seat belt force limiter 65
Display 129
366
Index
Service life (tires) 237 Speed in cruise control 171 Settings menu
Service System see FSS Speedometer display mode 128 Functions in 123
Setting Station selection mode 132 Individual vehicle settings 123
Clock 25 Temperature (interior) 158 Submenus 124
Convenience functions 133 Temperature indicator 127 Shift lock 346
Cruise control 170 Time display mode 127 Shifting
Daytime running lamp mode 129 Units Gear selector lever positions 142
Higher speed in cruise control 171 Speedometer 128 Shifting into optimal
Individual vehicle settings 123 Temperature 127 Gear range 141
Instrument lighting 112 Time 127 Side marker lamps 296
Interior lighting delayed Setting current speed 170 Replacing bulbs 295, 300
switch-off 132 Settings Side markers
Key-dependent memory 135 Convenience functions 133 Cleaning 246
Lamps and lighting (control Factory, SmartKey 87 Side windows
system) 129 Individual (SmartKey) 135 Automatic opening 164
Language, multifunction display 128 Lighting (control system) 129 Cleaning 247
Locator lighting 130 Menus and submenus 117 Closing 164, 165
Lower speed in cruise control 171 Resetting all (control system) 123 Closing with SmartKey 165
Miles/kilometers in Resetting in the submenu 125 Opening 164, 165
speedometer 128 Selective 87 Opening fully 164
Night security illumination 131 Opening with SmartKey 165
Parking position for exterior rear view Stopping 164
mirrors 135
Slower speed in cruise control 171
367
Index
Signal strength (telephone) 138 Mounting 307 Starting difficulties 44
Simultaneous wiping and washing Speed Starting position 33
Windshield wipers 48 Setting current 170 Starting the engine 43
Single wipe 48 Speed settings Station (radio)
Sliding/pop-up roof 166 Cruise control 171 Search 121
Closing 166, 292 Speedometer 25 Station selection
Closing with SmartKey 167 Setting units 128 Setting 132
Opening 166, 292 Speedometer display mode Steep terrain 216
Opening with SmartKey 167 Selecting 128 Steering column
Stopping 167 Split rear bench seat 176 Adjusting in /out 37
SmartKey 86 SRS 64, 346 Adjusting up/down 37
Locking and unlocking 86 Indicator lamp 258 Steering wheel
Opening and closing the slid- Standing lamp, front Adjusting 37
ing/pop-up roof with 167 Replacing bulbs 297 Adjusting in/out 37
Opening and closing windows Standing lamps Adjusting up/down 37
with 165 Replacing bulbs 295, 296 Buttons 26
Unlocking with 32 Standing water Cleaning 248
Snow chains 241 Driving instructions 213 Heated 203
Spare parts service 324 Starter switch 23, 33 Stolen vehicle
Spare wheel 285 Positions 33 Tracking services 197
368
Index
Stopping Summer opening feature 165 Front axle differential lock 151
Sliding/pop-up roof 167 Sun visors 154 Front fog lamps 107
Windows 164 Sunroof Hazard warning flasher 108
Storage compartments Messages in display 281 Headlamps 46
Armrest 184 Supplemental Restraint System Heated steering wheel 203
Glove box 183 (SRS) 346 High beams 108
Storage spaces Switching Rear axle differential lock 151
Cup holders 184 Transfer case 145 Rear fog lamp 107
Storing (Memory function) Switching off Transfer case differential lock 150
Positions into memory 102 Automatic central locking (control Windshield wipers 47
Submenus system) 133 Symbol messages
Convenience 133 Delayed (exterior lamps) 131 Multifunction display 265
For settings 117 Differential locks 151 Synchronizing
In control system 119 Engine 52 ESP 263
Instrument cluster 127 ESP 79 Head restraints 95
Lighting 129 Hazard warning flasher 108 Seat adjustment 95
Resetting functions in Control Headlamps 52
T
system 125 Heated steering wheel 203
Tachometer 25, 113
Selecting 124 Switching on
Displaying gear range 142
Settings menu 124 Automatic central locking (control
Overspeed range 113
Vehicle 132 system) 133
Differential locks 150
ESP 81
369
Index
Tail lamps 301 Engine oil additives 335, 340 Tele Aid System 347
Cleaning 246 Fuel requirements 336 Telematics* 347
Replacing bulbs 296 Fuels 333 Telephone
Tailgate Gasoline additives 336 Answering a call 138
Closing 90 Lubricants 333 Dialing a number from the phone
Message in display 282 Main dimensions 332 book 139
Opening 89, 90 Premium unleaded gasoline 335 Ending a call 138
Separately locking 90 Rims and tires 329 Loading phone book 139
Separately unlocking 91 Weights and ratings 332 Operating 137
Tailgate lock 284 Windshield and headlamp washer Redialing 139
Unlocking in an emergency 287 system 334, 339 Telephone* 26, 189
Tar stains 245 Tele Aid 190 Messages in display 281
Technical data Emergency calls 191 Temperature
Air conditioning refrigerant 335 Information 194 Display mode 127
Brake fluid 335 Initiating an emergency call Grades of tires 341
Coolant 333 manually 193 Setting interior temperature 158
Coolants 336 Messages in display 281 Setting units in display 127
Electrical system 331 Remote door unlock 197 Tires 238
Engine 328 Roadside Assistance 193 Text messages
Engine oil 334 Stolen vehicle tracking services 197 Multifunction display 261
System self-check 191 Tie-down rings (Cargo
Tele Aid System 190 compartment) 182
Upgrade signals 196 Tightening torque 347
370
Index
Tightening torque (Wheel bolts) 310 Tools 283 Transfer case differential lock
Time Tow-away alarm 27, 83 Switching on 150
Setting display mode 127 Arming 83 Transmission gear selector lever 290
Time display mode Disarming 83 Unlocking manually 290
Setting 127 Disarming for transport 83 Transmission see Automatic transmission
Tire inflation pressure Tow-away alarm system Tread depth (tires) 240
Checking 237 Canceling alarm 84 Treadwear 340
Tire speed rating 211, 347 Towing eye, front 318 Trip computer 136
Tire traction 211 Towing eye, rear 318 Trip odometer
Tires 236, 329 Towing the vehicle 315 Resetting 113
Direction of rotation 237 Stranded vehicle 318 Trunk see Cargo compartment
Driving instructions 210 Towing the vehicle - various problem Turn signal lamps
Retreads 236 scenarios 317 Replacing bulbs 295, 296
Rims and tires 329 Tracking services Turn signals 23, 46
Service life 237 For stolen vehicle 197 Additional in mirrors 295
Temperature 238 Traction 340, 347 Cleaning lenses 246
Temperature grades 341 Transfer case 145, 347 Front bulbs 295
Tread depth 240 Gear range 145 Indicator lamps 25
Wear pattern 238 Messages in the multifunction Rear bulbs 296
Winter 240 display 146 Turning off
Switching 145 Engine 52
371
Index
U Uphill driving Vehicle battery 311
Units Cruise control 170 Vehicle care 244
Setting speedometer units 128 Upshifting 141 Cup holders 248
Setting temperature units 127 Useful features 183 Engine cleaning 246
Setting time units 127 Ashtrays 186 Gear selector lever 248
Unlocking 32, 86 Cigarette lighter 188 Hard plastic trim items 248
Driver s door in an emergency 287 Electrical outlet 188 Headlamps 246
Fuel filler flap 224 Interior storage spaces 183 Instrument cluster 248
Global 87 Tele Aid 190 Leather upholstery 249
In an emergency 287 Telephone* 189 Light alloy wheels 248
Selective settings 87 MB Tex upholstery 249
V
Separately the tailgate 91 Ornamental moldings 246
Vehicle
Tailgate in an emergency 287 Paintwork 245
Individual settings 123, 126
Transmission gear selector lever Plastic and rubber parts 249
Locking 27
manually 290 Power-washer 245
Locking in an emergency 288
Vehicle in an emergency 197 Seat belts 248
Lowering 310
With the SmartKey 32 Side markers 246
Service battery 311
Upgrade signals Steering wheel 248
Towing 315
Tele Aid 196 Tail lamps 246
Unlocking 27
Tar stains 245
Unlocking in an emergency 287
372
Index
Turn signals 246 Washing the vehicle 245 Windshield wipers 23, 47
Vehicle washing 246 Wear pattern (tires) 238 Fast wiper speed 47
Window cleaning 247 Weights and ratings 332 Interval wiping 49
Wiper blades 247 Wheel change Rear window wiper/washer 49
Wood trims 249 Tightening torque 310 Replacing wiper blades 304
Vehicle identification number (VIN) 326 Wheels Single wipe 48
Vehicle jack 284 Rotating 238 Switching on 47
Vehicle tool kit 283 Tires and wheels 236 Wiping with windshield washer
Vehicle washing 246 Windows see Side windows fluid 48
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 326, Windshield Winter driving 240
347 Defogging 160 Block heater 240
Voice control system* 347 Replacing wiper blades 304 Snow chains 241
Washer fluid 234, 339 Tires 240
W
Washer system 339 Winter driving instructions 212
Warning indicators
Windshield washer fluid 339 Winter tires 240
Rear Parking Assist* 174
Message in display 282 Wiper blades
Warning sounds
Mixing ratio 339 Cleaning 247
Drivers seat belts 62
Refilling 234 Installing 305
Exterior lighting 105
Wiping with 48 Removing 304
Parking brake 45
Windshield washer system 339 Replacing 304
Warranty coverage 325
Wiper/washer
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Rear window 49
373
Index
Wiping
And washing simultaneously 48
Interval 47, 49
With windshield washer fluid 48
Wood trims
Cleaning 249
374
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle
properly. For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator s Manual.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2285-31
Press time 08/20/03
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany